Psion 7515UB EP10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual EP10 Hand Held Computer with Windows Embedded

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1683458
Application ID	hHDsVpoEaCrsaTM5ekNkpA==
Document Description	user manual 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	405.74kB (5071692 bits)
Date Submitted	2012-04-25 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-04-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-10-31 23:07:22
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-10-31 23:07:22
Document Title	EP10 Hand-Held Computer with Windows Embedded
Document Creator	FrameMaker 9.0
Document Author:	E. Szabo

EP10 Hand-Held Computer
(Model Number 7515)
Windows Embedded 6.5
User Manual
April 5, 2011
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
Part No. 8000227.A
This user manual supports Model Numbers:
• 7515U with FCC ID: GM37515UA and IC: 2739D-7515UA
• 7515C with FCC ID: GM37515CA
• 7515 with FCC ID: GM37515UB and IC: 2739D-7515UB
© Copyright 2011 by Psion Inc., Mississauga, Ontario
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9
http:\\www.psionteklogix.com
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc., is issued in strict
confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole
purpose of promoting the sale of Psion manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this
document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any
manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Inc. reserves the right to make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not
limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including
but not limited to typographical errors.
Psion, Psion Teklogix, and EP10 are trademarks of Psion Inc.
Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Psion Inc. is under license.
All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders.
Preliminary Draft
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
EP10 Hand-Held Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 The EP10 Hand-Held. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
2.1
2.2
Features of the EP10 Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.3 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.2.4 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.1 EP10 QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.2 Locking the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.3 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.4 The Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3.5 The Keypad Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4
The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.1 Setting the Backlight Intensity & Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.2 Adjusting the Backlight using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.3 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.4.4 Screen Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.5
EP10 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.5.1 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
2.6
Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.6.1 Adjusting Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.7
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.7.1 Storing Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.8
2.9
Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
2.9.1
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.10 Inserting the microSD and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.10.1 Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.11 The Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12.1 Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12.2 Cleaning the EP10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
3.1
Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.1 Navigating using a Touchscreen and Stylus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2
Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2.1 Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.3 Ownership Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3
Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3.1 Customising the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4
Managing Files and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4.1 Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.2 Renaming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.3 Copying a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.4 Deleting a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.1 Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Programs – Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.1 Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 4: Programs
4.1
ii
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
4.2
4.3
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.3.1 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4
4.5
4.6
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Office Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.6.1 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.6.2 OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.6.3 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.6.4 PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
File Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PTSI Imager Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Internet Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4.10.2 Using Internet Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.11.1 Creating a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.11.3 Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.11.4 Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.11.5 Synchronizing a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.12 Pictures & Videos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.12.1 Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.12.3 Opening a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.12.4 Deleting a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.12.5 Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.12.6 Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.12.7 Using the Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.13 Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.13.3 Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.14 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.15 Task Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
4.16 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
iii
Preliminary Draft
Contents
4.17 Internet Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.17.1 Browsing Web Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.18 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.18.1 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.19 Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 5: Settings
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
App Launch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.4.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.4.2 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.4.3 One Shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.4.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
5.4.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
5.4.6 Scancode Remapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
5.4.7 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
5.5
Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
5.5.1 Input Method Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
5.5.2 Options–Additional Choices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5.6
5.7
Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.7.1 Start Menu Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.8 Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5.9 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5.10 Sound & Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5.10.1 Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5.10.2 Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5.11 Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.11.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.11.2 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.12 System Tab Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.13 About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.14 About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
iv
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
5.15 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
5.15.1 Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
5.15.2 External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
5.15.3 Intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
5.16 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
5.16.1 Choosing a Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Customer Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Manage Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.23.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
5.24 Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.25 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.25.1 Main Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.25.2 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.26 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.26.1 Battery Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
5.26.2 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
5.26.3 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
5.26.4 Built-In Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
5.26.5 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
5.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
5.26.7 Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Screen Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Task Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Teklogix Error Handling Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
5.31.1 ErrorLogInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
5.31.2 NetLog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
5.32 Teklogix Imagers Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
5.33 Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
5.33.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
5.33.3 Translations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5.33.4 Ports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
5.34 Total Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
5.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
5.34.2 Restoring a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.35 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.35.1 Advanced Interface And Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
5.35.2 Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
5.35.3 Radio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
5.35.4 User System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
5.35.5 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
5.36 Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
5.37 Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
5.37.1 Navigation Bar Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
5.38 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
5.39 Bluetooth Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
5.39.1 The Devices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
5.39.2 Bluetooth Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
5.39.3 Bluetooth COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
5.39.4 Outgoing Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
5.39.5 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
5.39.6 Active Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
5.39.7 About Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
5.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
5.40 Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
5.40.1 Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
5.40.2 Call Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
5.41 Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
5.41.1 Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
5.42 Wireless Manager Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
5.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
5.42.2 Setting Up a Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
5.42.3 Network Adaptor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
5.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
5.42.5 VPN Connection Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
5.42.6 Managing an Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
5.42.7 Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
5.42.8 Proxy Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
vi
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
5.43 Wireless Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
5.44 Wireless WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
5.44.1 Softkey Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
5.44.2 Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
5.44.3 Disconnecting from a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
5.44.4 Advanced Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
5.44.5 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
5.44.6 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
5.45 Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
6.1
Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
6.1.1 The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
6.1.2 Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
6.1.3 Carrying Pouch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
6.2
6.3
6.4
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Adaptor Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Chargers and Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
6.4.1 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
6.4.2 Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
6.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
6.5
Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
6.5.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
6.5.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
6.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
6.5.4 Cleaning the RV4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
6.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
6.6
Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
6.6.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
6.6.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
6.6.3 Quad Dock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
6.6.4 Cleaning the RV4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
6.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
6.7
Quad Charger – Model No. RV3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
6.7.1 Charging the EP10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
6.7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
6.7.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
6.7.4 Charge Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
vii
Preliminary Draft
Contents
6.7.5
6.7.6
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
Charging Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
6.11.1 Important Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
6.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
6.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
6.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
6.12 The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
6.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
6.12.2 Cable Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
6.12.3 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
6.12.4 USB and Serial Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
6.12.5 Using the Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
6.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
6.13 EA11 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
6.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
6.14 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
6.15 Digital Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Chapter 7: Specifications
viii
7.1
EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
7.1.1 Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
7.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
7.1.4 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.5 Expansion Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.6 Bar Code Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.7 Digital Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.8 Voice Over IP (VOIP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
7.1.10 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
7.1.11 Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
7.2
Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
7.2.1 Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
7.2.2 Murata Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.3
7.4
Sierra Wireless MC5728V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Internal Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
7.4.1 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
A.1
A.2
Wireless WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.1 Taskbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.2 Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.1.3 Advanced Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.4 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.1.5 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.1.6 Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
B.1
B.2
Dock Port Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Battery Contact Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
C.1
C.2
Scanner Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
C.2.1 Options – Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
C.2.2 Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
C.2.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
C.2.5 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
C.2.6 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9
C.2.7 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.2.8 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.2.9 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.2.10 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.2.12 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.2.13 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.2.14 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
ix
Preliminary Draft
C.3
C.4
C.2.17 RSS Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C.2.18 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C.2.19 PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C.2.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Decoded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.3.1 Options – Decoded Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.3.2 Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.3.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C.3.4 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
C.3.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C.3.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.7 UPCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.8 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
C.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
C.3.10 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C.3.11 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
C.3.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
C.3.13 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
C.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
C.3.17 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
C.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
C.3.19 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C.3.20 TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C.3.21 PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
C.3.22 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
C.3.23 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C.4.1 Options – Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C.4.2 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C.4.3 Code 128 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C.4.4 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C.4.5 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C.4.6 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C.4.7 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C.4.8 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C.4.9 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C.4.10 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Contents
C.4.11
C.4.12
C.4.13
C.4.14
C.4.15
C.4.16
C.4.17
C.4.18
C.4.19
C.4.20
C.4.21
C.4.22
C.4.23
C.4.24
C.4.25
C.4.26
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
2D Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
2D QR Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Postal: Royal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Postal: Kix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Postal: Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2.1 Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2.2 Bar Code Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2.3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.2.4 Image Capture Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Using The Teklogix Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.3.1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.3.2 Selecting A Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.3.3 Setting The Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.3.4 Viewing A Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.3.5 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.3.6 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.3.7 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.4.1 Selecting A Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.4.2 Setting The Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.4.3 Viewing A Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.4.4 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.4.5 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.4.6 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
xi
Preliminary Draft
Contents
D.5
xii
D.4.7 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D.4.8 Setting The Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.4.9 Viewing A Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.4.10 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D.4.11 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
D.4.12 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D.4.13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
D.4.16 Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Teklogix Scanners Applet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
INTRODUCTION
1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 EP10 Hand-Held Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 The EP10 Hand-Held. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: Introduction
About This Manual
1.1
About This Manual
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the EP10 Hand-Held Computer (Model Number 7515).
Chapter 1: Introduction
provides a basic overview of the EP10 Hand-Held.
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
describes the steps required to get the EP10 ready for operation
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery. This
chapter also provides information about indicators, microSD and SIM card
installation along with general EP10 maintenance.
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
describes the Microsoft® Windows Embedded 6.5 Today screen and how to use
it. This chapter also outlines basics like moving around a window, displaying
menus, and so on.
Chapter 4: Programs
provides a description of the Windows Embedded 6.5 Programs options and
how to use them.
Chapter 5: Settings
provides details about Windows Embedded 6.5 Settings options and how to use
them.
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your EP10.
Chapter 7: Specifications
details radio, imager and battery specifications.
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
provides details about Wireless WAN radio.
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
describes port pinouts.
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
describes the bar codes supported by the imager available for the EP10.
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
describes the Teklogix Imagers applet and outlines how to use it.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
1.2
Text Conventions
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical
injury, equipment damage or data loss.
1.3
EP10 Hand-Held Features
Important: For all safety, regulatory and warranty information, refer to the ‘EP10
Hand-Held Regulatory & Warranty Guide’, PN 8000235.
For a complete list of EP10 Hand-Held features, physical attributes and
approvals, refer to Chapter 7,“Specifications”.
The EP10 is a personal digital assistant operates with the Windows Embedded 6.5 operating
system with a phone option. This EP10 is intended for use in commercial and light industrial
applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input
methodologies are supported by one of a variety of scanners available. Optimization for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and
carrying accessories.
Model
•
EP10 Hand-Held – Model Number 7515
Platform
•
•
•
•
AM3715 Processor
800 MHz (ARM Cortex A8)
On-board RAM: 256 MB SDRAM
On-board ROM: 2 GB Flash
Operating System
•
Microsoft Windows Embedded 6.5
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: Introduction
EP10 Hand-Held Features
User Interface
•
Display (Backlit)
- 3.7 in. VGA portrait mode
- Backlight feature 165 cd/m2 output
- Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen
- Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT
- Passive stylus or finger operation
•
Audio
- Built-in 85db mono speaker
- microphone
- receiver
•
Keyboard (Backlit)
- QWERTY
- High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight
- Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one-hand operation
•
Camera
- 3.2 Mega Pixel Colour
- Auto Focus
- Dual LED Flash
- Video capture capability
Wireless Communication
•
•
•
•
•
On-board IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
Bluetooth v2.1 radio (CCX V4 Certified)
UMTS 3.5G HSPA + CDMA EV-DO Rev A radio options
Integrated 5 band Antenna, supports both voice and data
SiRF starIV GPS
Note: 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: Introduction
The EP10 Hand-Held
Enhanced Features
•
•
•
•
•
Accelerometer
Digital Compass
Gyroscope
Light Sensor
Proximity Sensor
Expansion Slot
•
One microSD slot
VOIP (Voice Over IP)
•
1.3.1
Push-to-talk
The EP10 Hand-Held
Figure 1.1 EP10 Hand-Held – QWERTY
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: Introduction
The EP10 Hand-Held
Figure 1.2 Phone Keys
Send
Key
End
Key
Note: Refer to “Sending & Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad” on page 33 for
details about these keys.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
GETTING TO KNOW THE EP10
2.1 Features of the EP10 Hand-Held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4.1 Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 EP10 QWERTY Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Locking the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator
2.3.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Setting the Backlight Intensity & Duration . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Adjusting the Backlight using the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Screen Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 EP10 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
13
13
13
13
14
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
19
19
19
19
20
21
21
21
22
2.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.7.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.8 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.9 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.10 Inserting the microSD and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
2.10.1 Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.11 The Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12.1 Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.12.2 Cleaning the EP10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
2.1
Features of the EP10 Hand-Held
Receiver
Light Sensor
3 Light Emit t ing Diodes
(LEDs)
Ver t ical Scr oll
But t on
Ent er But t on
RIGHT SIDE
Microphone
Volume But t on
Scan But t on
Scanner/ Imager
TOP
LEFT SIDE
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
The Battery
Figure 2.1 Back of EP10
Speaker
St ylus
Flash
Camera
Bat t ery Lat ch
Bat t ery &
SIM/ microSD Card
Compart ment s
Hand St rap
Anchor
Figure 2. 2 Port s
Docking Port /
USB On-The-Go
Hand St rap
Anchor
2.2
The Battery
The EP10 operates with a 3600 mAh, Lithium-Ion battery pack, Model No. RV3010.
Preparing the EP10 for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in
the EP10.
12
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Battery Safety
2.2.1
Battery Safety
Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that
you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled ‘EP10 Hand-Held Regulatory & Warranty Guide’,
PN 8000235.
2.2.2
Removing the Battery Pack
Important: Always shut down the EP10 before removing the battery. To safely remove the
battery, press and hold down the Power button until the ‘Shutdown’ screen is
displayed. Choose ‘Shutdown’ and tap on OK.
Keep in mind also that all EP10s are equipped with internal super-capacitors
that will save the current data for up to 5 minutes while the battery
is swapped.
Refer to “Preparing the EP10 for Operation” on page 13 for more details about removing
and installing the battery.
2.2.3
Battery Swap Time
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is approximately 5 minutes – you will not lose data if the battery is
replaced within this time frame.
To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to
the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.
The Suspend Threshold feature allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the
EP10 will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the EP10 will
run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of
time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the EP10 shuts off with more energy left in the
battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
(Refer to “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 142 for details about
reserving battery power for data backup purposes.)
2.2.4
Charging the Battery
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. They must
be fully charged prior to use.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
13
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Charging the Battery
Note: Do not leave a spare battery to charge for more than 72 hours. Charging for more
than 72 hours may damage the battery or lead to charge capacity reduction.
Important: If the battery is overheated (>60° C) or if the battery capacity is very low
(<100 mAh), the unit will not switch on when the Power key is pressed.
Under the above conditions, when AC power is applied, the EP10 will still
refuse to power up; instead, a yellow LED will begin blinking and until the
battery is replaced, or in the case of low battery capacity, the battery is
charged to an acceptable level, the EP10 will not switch on.
Keep in mind also that, along with the battery, the EP10 is equipped with internal, supercapacitors that preserves data stored on the EP10 for a short period of time while the battery
is swapped.
2.2.4.1 Chargers and Docking Stations
Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations,
refer to Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” beginning on
page 215.
Lithium-Ion battery packs must be charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a
variety of chargers and docking stations. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
14
AC wall adaptor (Model No. R3055) operates as an AC power source and when
plugged in, also charges the battery installed in the EP10. (see page 237)
Desktop Docking Station (Model No. RV4000) operates as both a charger and a docking
station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the EP10 and a spare battery
can be charged simultaneously. (see page 225)
Quad Docking Station (Model No. RV4004) can charge the battery of up to four EP10s
inserted in the docking station. (see page 230)
Quad Battery Charger (Model No. RV3004) can charge up to four batteries inserted in
the charger (see TBD)
USB & Charger Snap Module (Model No. RV4001) allows you to connect a Mini-B
USB cable and a power cable to the EP10. (see TBD)
DE9 RS232 & charger Snap Module (Model No. V4002) provides an RS232 connection and charge power to the EP10. (see TBD)
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
The Keyboard
Note: Refer to “Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time” on page 23 for additional information about the battery.
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process
until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
2.3
The Keyboard
2.3.1
EP10 QWERTY Keyboard
The EP10 is available with a QWERTY keyboard with [Send] and [End] phone keys.
Figure 2. 3 QWERTY Keyboard wit h Phone Keys
Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or
key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.
The [BLUE] modifier key provide access to additional keys and system functions. These
functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
15
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Locking the Keyboard
Note: Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.
2.3.2
Locking the Keyboard
You can lock the keyboard to prevent accidental key presses. To set up the locking/unlocking key sequence:
Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons. Tap on the right arrow icon
in the bottom-right
corner of the screen to scroll to the Lock Sequence tab.
Refer to “Lock Sequence” on page 106 for details about setting up this function.
•
2.3.3
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], and [BLUE] keys are modifier keys. Pressing a modifier key
changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, on a QWERTY keyboard, the
‘@’ symbol is printed in blue on the [A] key. Pressing the [BLUE] key, a modifier key, followed by the [A] key displays the ‘@’ symbol rather than the letter A.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that
they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be
pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
Note: Keep in mind that the [ALT] and [CTRL] keys are only available on keypads that are not equipped with phone keys. You can, however, access the [CTRL]
key using the onscreen, soft keyboard.
2.3.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator
When a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in the
softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or not a modifier key is active. If the shift-state indicator icon is not visible (you can only see the soft
keyboard icon), you may need to take a few steps to display the shift-state indicator icon.
•
•
•
16
Tap on Start>Settings followed by the Buttons icon.
Tap on the One Shots tab at the bottom of the screen.
Tap in the check box next to Show modifier key state to display the shift-state
indicator icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
The Keys
Figure 2.4 Shif t -St at e Indicat or Icon
Shif t -St at e Indicat or Icon
replaces Sof t Keyboard Icon
Sof t Keyboard Icon
2.3.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys
Note: The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that, for example,
pressing a modifier key once will lock the key ‘on’. Refer to “One Shots” on page 99
for details. Note too that by default, the [ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’ when pressed
only once.
When a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock
or turn it off.
To help you identify when a modifier key is locked ‘on’, the key is represented in the shiftstate indicator icon with a black frame around it.
Figure 2.5 Shift -St at e Indicat or Icon – Locked Modif ier Key
Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the shift-state indicator icon.
2.3.4
The Keys
The [SHIFT] Key
The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the
symbols above the numeric keys. You can lock this key ‘on’ so that when you press an alpha
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
17
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
The Keys
key, an upper case character is displayed. When you press a numeric key, the associated
symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen.
If you press the [SHIFT] key twice, it is locked ‘on’ essentially acting as a [CAPS] key, displaying uppercase characters. In this state, if you type a numeric key, the number rather than
the symbol above it is displayed. Press [SHIFT] again to turn the [CAPS] function off.
The Arrow Keys
The Arrow keys are located near the top of the keyboard. The arrow keys move the cursor
around the screen–up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.
The [BKSP/DEL] Key
The [BKSP] key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one
character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.
The [DEL] key ([BLUE] [BKSP]) erases the character at the cursor position.
The [ALT] and [CTRL] Keys
The [ALT] and [CTRL] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application
dependent.
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box or
activity and return to the previous one.
The [SPACE] Key
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [SCAN] Keys
The EP10 is equipped with two [SCAN] keys located on the keyboard just below the display
along with [SCAN] buttons situated on the left and right sides of the hand-held. [SCAN]
keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can
be remapped to serve other functions.
18
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
The Keypad Backlight
The Function Keys–[F1] to [F10]
Function keys [F1] to [F10] perform special, custom-defined functions. These keys are accessed by pressing [BLUE] followed by numeric keys [1] to [10]. They can be used with the
Windows Mobile 6.5 operating system or another application.
The Macro Keys
While macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 12 macro functions can
be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on
page 103 for details about mapping keys.
For details about creating a macro, refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 101.
2.3.5
The Keypad Backlight
The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon accessed
by tapping on Start>Settings. Refer to “Backlight” on page 120 for details about this option.
2.4
The Display
EP10s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light
conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped.
2.4.1
Setting the Backlight Intensity & Duration
To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on,
you’ll need to choose the Backlight icon.
• Tap on Start>Settings and then, tap on System tab>Backlight icon.
Refer to “Backlight” on page 120 for details.
2.4.2
Adjusting the Backlight using the Keyboard
The display backlight can be adjusted using a keyboard key sequence. The key sequence
varies depending on the type of keyboard:
•
For alphanumeric keyboards, lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’. Press [ESC] until a satisfactory brightness level is attained.(TBD)
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
19
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen
Important: Keep in mind that this sequence cycles the display backlight up to full brightness and once reached, begins to dim the backlight until the display fades to
black – nothing is visible. At this point, you’ll need to continue pressing these
keys until the display brightens up to a usable level.
2.4.3
Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen
If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer
is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.
20
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon.
•
Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Screen Orientation
•
Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (calibrate) the screen.
Note: This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tapping on the
ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font
appearance. The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font
displayed on the screen.
2.4.4
Screen Orientation
In addition to screen calibration, the Screen icon allows you to determine how your screen
will be oriented – portrait or landscape (right- or left-handed).
•
•
•
2.5
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Screen icon.
In the General tab, tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use
your EP10.
EP10 Indicators
The EP10 uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages and audio tones to
indicate the various conditions of the EP10, the batteries, the scans and so on.
2.5.1
LEDs
Three LEDs are located on the upper-right side of the EP10, just above the display. When
you press the Power button, the LED flashes yellow to indicate that the EP10 has been
powered up. The LED table following outlines the behaviour of the LED while the EP10 is
docked in a charger.
Keep in mind that the application running on the EP10 can dictate how the application LED
operates. Review the documentation provided with your application to determine
LED behaviour.
Table 2.1
Funct ion of EP10 LEDs
LED
Green Charge LED
(left-most LED)
Funct ion
Charge indicator. See the table below for descriptions of Charge
LED behaviour.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
21
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Audio Indicators
Table 2.1
Funct ion of EP10 LEDs
LED
Funct ion
Yellow Application LED
(centre LED)
Application LED. This LEDs behaviour is application dependent.
Blue Radio Power LED
(right-most LED)
Radio power indicator.
If the EP10 is attached to an external power supply, the charge LED (the left-most LED) reflects the battery charge status.
Table 2.2
EP10 Charge LED Behaviour
LED Behaviour
Charge St at us
Solid Green
Charge complete
Slow Blinking Green (LED off
longer than on)
Charge in progress. Battery charged to less than 80% capacity.
Long Blinking Green (LED on
longer than off)
Battery charged to greater than 80% capacity.
Fast Blinking Green (LED
switches on and off rapidly)
Charge failure. (Defective battery or battery outside temperature range (0° C to 50° C))
Note: When the Power button is pressed, the yellow LED will flash to let you know that the
hand-held is powered up. At this point, you can go ahead and release the Power
button.
2.6
Audio Indicators
The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard character
is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match
field or the battery is low. To specify how you want your EP10 to respond under various
conditions, refer to “Sounds” on page 117.
2.6.1
Adjusting Speaker Volume
The Volume button is located on the left side of the EP10, just above the Scan button. It is a
rocker button; pressing the top half of the button increases volume while pressing the bottom
half of the button decreases it.
22
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
2.7
Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time
Note: When the battery is at 50% capacity, a ‘low battery’ warning is displayed. When the
battery is at about 10% capacity, a ‘very low battery’ notification bubble appears.
As Lithium-Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity
remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the EP10 at temperature
extremes will shorten the battery life.
Lithium-Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the EP10 battery system (including chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance.
To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:
•
The display backlight is a large drain on the battery. Try to keep its brightness as low
as possible.
• The EP10 is ‘event’ driven – that is, when it is not in use, the EP10 reverts to sleep
mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key
press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers. Power consumption is reduced if you avoid
unnecessary events, and allow the EP10 to sleep as much as possible.
• The battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence.
Tapping on the Power icon under Start>Settings>System tab displays a dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery status of the battery installed in your EP10.
•
2.7.1
When the EP10 is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to
draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless the
EP10 is left in suspend state for more than a week – for long-term storage, the battery
should be removed.
Storing Batteries
Long term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:
•
•
•
•
Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.
Lithium-Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batteries at temperatures between 0° C and 20° C.
Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries can be
damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored
for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit.
To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60% every 4 or 6
months to prevent over-discharge damage.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
23
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
•
2.8
A ‘never used’ Lithium-Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or
no useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries as perishable goods.
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in
your EP10 before performing data uploads.
The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.
Note: Refer to “Chargers and Docking Stations” on page 223 for more details.
The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or
server. An optional 10/100baseT Ethernet module is also available.
Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP connections to a PC or server through a 10/100baseT Ethernet connection.
When an EP10 is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in
the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The EP10 also detects the presence of the
Ethernet network.
2.9
Bluetooth Radio
Note: Integrated Bluetooth radios are standard on EP10 units. Keep in mind also that
Bluetooth is available simultaneously with WAN and 802.11g on a single EP10.
The EP10 is equipped with an on-board Bluetooth radio. This type of radio enables short
range data communication between devices. The Bluetooth also provides the capability to
use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other
Bluetooth devices. Refer to “The Bluetooth GPRS Phone” on page 180 for setup details.
24
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset
2.9.1
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset
Note: Headset pairing information is also available in the Getting Started Centre in the
Today screen on your EP10.
Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your EP10, make certain that
the Bluetooth device power is enabled; it is enabled by default. If, for some reason, it has
been disabled:
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab and then, tap on the Power icon to display the
Power dialog box.
• Tap on the Built-in Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth.
• Next, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.
• Tap on the Mode tab, and check Turn on Bluetooth. Tap OK.
• Turn your headset on and place it within a few feet of your EP10.
• If needed, set your headset to visible so that the EP10 can detect it and establish a
connection.
Most headsets are in pairing mode by default. If this is not the case, follow the headset manufacturer’s instructions to place the headset in pairing mode.
•
• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.
• In the Devices tab, tap Add new device. Wait for the EP10 to scan for devices.
• Choose the headset device from the list and tap on Next.
If the headset has authentication enabled, the EP10 then prompts you to provide a passcode.
• Type the passcode (or PIN – Personal Identification Number), and then tap on Next.
The EP10 then displays a list of services. Choose the Hands Free service. (If you are attempting to pair another device, choose it from this list.)
•
2.10
With Hands Free checked (enabled), tap Finish. The headset is now paired.
Inserting the microSD and SIM Card
There are two card holders available in the battery compartment of the EP10 – the lower
holder is provided for a microSD (micro Secure Digital) and the upper holder is for a SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module) card.
The microSD cards provide additional non-volatile memory to your EP10. SIM cards
provide access to the voice option, the Internet, and so on.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
25
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Inserting the Cards
2.10.1 Inserting the Cards
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.11
Switch off the EP10 – press and hold down the Power key, and when the Shutdown
screen is displayed, choose Shutdown and tap on OK.
Slide the battery latch to the right to unlock the battery, and remove it.
Pull the SD door down as the arrow icon on the door indicates.(TBD)
Orient the microSD or SIM card according to the legend stamped into the plastic. the
SD and SIM doors have guides or rails into which you can slide the card
For microSD, slide the card into the guides in the microSD door on the left-hand
slot.(TBD)
For SIM cards, slide the card in the right-hand slot.(TBD)
Slide the protective door back into place, and snap it shut.
The Camera
A built-in digital camera is available for the EP10. This option allows you snap still photographs or create short video clips. The Pictures & Videos applet is used to access and
configure the camera. For more details about the camera, refer to “Pictures & Videos” on
page 75.
2.12
General Maintenance
2.12.1 Caring for the Touchscreen
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive
coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is
susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or
cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating.
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
• sodium hydroxide,
• concentrated caustic solutions,
• benzyl alcohol, and
• concentrated acids.
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (model number CH6110TBD). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly
but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched
and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
26
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10
Cleaning the EP10
2.12.2 Cleaning the EP10
Important: Do not immerse the EP10 in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent
to wipe the unit clean.
•
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the EP10 unit.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the keypad or touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
27
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
USING WINDOWS EMBEDDED 6.5
3.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications
3.1.1 Navigating using a Touchscreen and Stylus . .
3.2 Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today Screen. . . .
3.2.1 Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar . . .
3.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Ownership Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . . .
3.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments. .
3.2.6.2 Adding Reminders . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6.3 Using Categories . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments . . . . . . . .
3.3 Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Customising the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Managing Files and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Renaming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
31
31
32
34
36
37
37
40
40
41
42
43
43
43
44
45
45
45
46
46
46
47
3.7 Programs – Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.9 Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.10 Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.1 Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.2 The Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
29
Preliminary Draft
3.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
30
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications
3.1
Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded 6.5 for portable devices or desktop
Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. On the EP10, this is accomplished using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse.
3.1.1
Navigating using a Touchscreen and Stylus
Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need recalibration. Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 20.
A touchscreen is a standard feature on all EP10s. Each is equipped with a stylus – a pointing
tool – stored in a slot at the bottom of the unit.
•
3.2
Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applications and programs, make selections, and so on.
Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today Screen
Keep in mind that if your EP10 is running Windows Embedded 6.5, the Today screen will
offer Phone connectivity in the Navigation Bar at the top of the screen and a Phone softkey
in the Softkey Bar at the bottom of the screen.
Phone Set t ings
Volume Cont rol
Connect ivit y Indicat or
Bat t ery Charge St at e
St art But t on
Today’s Dat e
Navigat ion Bar
Clock
WiFi & Bluet oot h
Get t ing St art ed
Ownership
E-mail Not if icat ion
Tasks To Complet e
Calendar-Upcoming
Appoint ment s
Sof t key Bar
Phone Sof t key
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
31
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar
The Today screen displays all your important information – tasks, unread e-mails and upcoming appointments – all in one place. The Start menu provides access to everything else
you’ll need.
3.2.1
Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar
The navigation bar along the top of the screen provides icons that, when tapped, open their
associated programs. If you’re unit is equipped with Windows Embedded 6.5, you’ll be see a
Phone hotkey for quick access to phone settings.
Hot keys
Phone Set t ings
Volume Cont rol
St art But t on
Bat t ery Capacit y
Connect ivit y
Navigat ion Bar
Note: When a peripheral is attached to the docking/usb port of the EP10, an associated
icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar to indicate that the EP10 has recognized the connection.
Start Button
Tapping on the Start button displays the Start menu.
32
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar
Connectivity
The Connectivity hotkey provides a shortcut to the Connections tab in the Settings
window. This tab provides access to Bluetooth, network, network card and internet
connection setups.
Phone Settings
If your EP10 is running Windows Embedded 6.5, it is equipped with a phone option. An
EP10 in which a SIM card and radio are installed can access phone settings along with the
Wireless Manager from this pop-up bubble. Any active connections are also listed here.
Volume Control
Tapping on this icon displays a sliding tab that allows you to adjust the speaker volume or
turn the speaker on and off.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
33
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
Two volume adjustments are provided – one for the speaker volume and the other for the
phone dialer volume.
Speaker
Volume
Phone
Dialer Volume
Battery Capacity
Tapping on the Battery hotkey displays the Battery tab allowing you to view the remaining
battery capacity in the battery.
3.2.2
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
This option displays the current date. If you need to adjust the date or set an alarm:
•
34
In the Today screen, tap on today’s date.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm
The Clock & Alarms screen is displayed.
• Tap on the drop-down menu arrows to set the GMT, time and date.
An option to set the date and time for a visiting time zone is also available.
To set an alarm:
•
Tap on the Alarms tab.
You can set a maximum of three alarms.
•
•
Tap in the checkbox to enable an alarm.
Tap the day on which you want the alarm to go off – Sunday through Saturday.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
35
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Ownership Information
•
Tap on the time to display the clock.
Time Field
•
To set the time, in the time field below the clock, tap on the hour to highlight it, and
type the hour at which you want the alarm to ring. To set the minutes, highlight the minutes, and type the appropriate minutes, or
You can also assign the alarm activation time using the clock graphic. Position the stylus
on the hour hand of the clock, and drag it to the correct hour. Do the same for the
minute hand.
•
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Note: Tapping on the ‘More’ tab displays a dialog box in which you can choose to ‘Display the clock on the title bar in all programs’.
3.2.3
Ownership Information
This option allows you to add your personal information to the EP10. Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.
36
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
E-mail Notification
•
Tap on Owner, listed in the Today screen as Tap here to set owner information to
display a screen in which you can type information.
•
Type your name, company name, address, telephone number and e-mail address.
Note: You can type information using the EP10 keyboard, or you can tap on the soft keyboard icon in the bottom right corner of the softkey bar to display an onscreen
keyboard.
The Ownership screen has two additional tabs–Notes where you can add any pertinent, additional information and Options where you can specify whether you want the desktop to
display your ‘identification’ information or your ‘note’ information.
3.2.4
E-mail Notification
If you have any e-mail, it will be indicated in the Today desktop screen. To view your e-mail,
tap on the E-mail notification option represented by an icon in the shape of an envelope.
Refer to “Messaging” on page 84 for details about setting up your Inbox.
3.2.5
Task Notification
Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming projects,
and so on. If you’ve assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how many active tasks
you have.
Note: You can synchronize the Task Notification option using ActiveSync so that any tasks
are displayed on your EP10 as well as your PC. Refer to “Synchronization” on
page 59 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
37
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Task Notification
•
Tap on the Tasks option to display a list of tasks.
Creating a Task
•
•
•
Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task. The text is replaced with a blinking cursor. If you prefer to type the task using the soft keyboard, tap on the soft keyboard
icon in the softkey bar.
Type your task description.
Tap anywhere in the blank part of the screen, or press the Power button to add the task to
your list.
Editing a Task
•
38
Tap on a task in the task list to highlight it. Tap Edit in the softkey bar at the bottom of
the screen to display a detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Task Notification
Figure 3.1 Task Det ails Screen
Each of the nine items in this screen, when tapped, displays a drop-down menu where you
can choose from a list of options.
•
Once you’ve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on OK to save your changes.
Note: You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task your
are defining.
The task will be listed in the Today screen as an Active Task.
Deleting a Task
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap on Delete Task.
Marking a Task as Completed
•
In the Tasks list, tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed.
Sorting Tasks
In the Tasks list, tap on the Menu option in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and
tap on Sort By.
You can choose from Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date or Due Date. The tasks are arranged in the list according to the criterion you chose.
•
Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen
•
Tap on Menu in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on Filter.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
39
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
You can choose All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks, or Completed
Tasks. The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose.
3.2.6
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the
weeks, months and years ahead.
Note: You can synchronize the Calendar using ActiveSync so that any meetings, appointments and so on are displayed on your EP10 Today screen as well as on your PC.
Refer to “Synchronization” on page 59 for details.
•
Tap on the Upcoming Appointments option in the Today screen, or tap on
Start>Calendar to display the calendar.
The default calendar displays an Agenda of appointments for the week, divided into days.
You can choose to leave the calendar as is, or you can tap on the Day softkey to reflect the
Week, Month or Year.
3.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments
•
40
In the Calendar screen, tap on Menu in the softkey bar, and then tap on
New Appointment.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
Figure 3.2 Appoint ment Det ail Screen
•
•
In the Subject field, name the appointment.
Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.
Note: Refer to “Adding Reminders” on page 41 for details about reminders. Refer
to“Using Categories” on page 42 for information about this option.
•
Tap on OK to save your changes and close the screen.
3.2.6.2 Adding Reminders
If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:
•
•
•
In the Reminder field, choose Remind me from the drop-down menu.
In the second Reminder field, tap on the number in the field to display a drop-down
menu where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30. Tap on minute(s) to
display a drop-down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder –
minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).
Tap OK to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
41
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
•
Tap the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen. The
reminder is indicated by the small, bell icon.
3.2.6.3 Using Categories
Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your EP10.
To assign an appointment to a category:
•
Tap on an appointment in the Today screen. In the Calendar screen, tap on the
appointment again.
Tap the Categories field to display the Categories screen.
•
•
Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the appointment.
Tap OK. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.
•
42
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Start Menu
Note: You can create a new category by tapping on New in the softkey bar at the bottom of
the screen.
3.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments
•
•
3.3
Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete.
Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop-up menu.
Start Menu
To display the Start menu:
•
Tap on the Start button in the upper-left corner of the Navigation Bar.
St art But t on
Navigat ion Bar
Cust om-chosen
programs
Most recent ly
used programs
Windows Mobile
command cent re
•
3.3.1
Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work.
Customising the Start Menu
You can choose the items you want to appear in the Start menu – items you use most often.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
43
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Managing Files and Folders
3.4
•
Tap on Start>Settings.
•
In the Personal tab, tap on the Menus icon.
•
Tap the checkboxes next to the items you would like to appear in your Start menu.
When you’ve completed your selections, tap on OK.
Managing Files and Folders
Windows Embedded 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible with
File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you
would on any desktop PC.
44
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Creating a New Folder
•
Tap on Start>Programs>File Explorer.
Tap t o display sort ing opt ions
Tap t o display addit ional
st orage/ f iles
Files st ored
here aut omat ically
Tap t o move
back one level
3.4.1
Creating a New Folder
•
•
•
3.4.2
Renaming a File
•
•
3.4.3
Tap Start>Programs>File Explorer.
Tap Menu>New Folder in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
Use the EP10 keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder.
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop-up menu.
Tap Rename. The file name is highlighted. Type a new name.
Copying a File
•
•
•
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop-up menu.
Tap on Copy in the pop-up menu.
Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file.
Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen—away from other icons—until a
pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
45
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Deleting a File
3.4.4
Deleting a File
•
•
3.5
Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop-up menu
is displayed.
Tap Delete to remove the file.
Using Menus
In Windows Embedded 6.5, the menu is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Sof t key Bar
Menu
To execute a command:
•
3.5.1
Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the command
you want to execute.
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access to a
group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar. To display a popup menu:
46
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
The Softkey Bar
3.6
•
Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is displayed on the screen
followed by a pop-up menu.
•
Tap on the command you want to execute.
The Softkey Bar
The EP10 is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. It displays softkeys that
allow you to access menus and commands. It also displays the soft keyboard icon.
Sof t keyboard
Sof t keyboard icon
Sof t key Bar
Sof t keys
Softkeys
Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey–for example, in the
sample screen above, the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word
Mobile. The View softkey lets you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
47
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
The Softkey Bar
The Soft Keyboard Icon
Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alternative to the EP10 keyboard.
Shift-State Indicator Icon
The softkey bar can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates active
modifier keys–[SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE].
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons>One Shots. Tap in the checkbox next to Show modifier key state, to replace the soft keyboard icon with the shift-state indicator icon.
Shif t -st at e indicat or icon
When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon. In the
example above, the [ORANGE] key was activated.
To distinguish a ‘locked’ modifier key – a key that has been locked ‘on’ – from a modifier
key that is only active until the next key is pressed, ‘locked’ keys are encircled in a black
frame in the shift-state indicator icon. Refer to “Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State
Indicator” on page 16 for details.
Note: You can still access the soft keyboard while the shift-state indicator icon is displayed.
Tapping on this icon displays the soft keyboard. Tapping on the shift-state indicator
icon again removes the soft keyboard.
48
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Programs – Using Applications
3.7
Programs – Using Applications
•
Tap Start>Programs to display the programs installed on your EP10.
Figure 3. 3 Program Screen Icons
Opening an Application
•
Tap on a Program icon to launch the associated program.
Minimizing an Application
•
Tap on the X button in the upper-right corner of an application screen to minimize
the application.
Note: Although it looks like a Close button, this button does not close the application–it
only minimizes it.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
49
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Settings
Opening, Closing and Switching Applications
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon – the
Task Manager screen is opened.
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications). This applet provides a
number of options to manage your opened applications.
End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on
the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
• End All Tasks: To shut down all applications, tap on the Menu softkey, and choose
End All Tasks.
• Switch To: To make an application listed in this screen active, highlight the application,
and tap on Menu>Switch To.
For additional information about the Task Manager, refer to “Task Manager” on page 145.
•
3.8
Settings
•
50
Tap Start>Settings to display the setting options for your EP10.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Help
Figure 3.4 Set t ings Icons
Settings are divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections. Refer to Chapter 5:
“Settings” for details about the options available to you.
3.9
Help
Tapping on the Help option displays a screen of help topics that are content-specific; if for
example, the Today screen is displayed and you tap on Start>Help, the help screen will
provide topics about the Today screen. You can perform a help content search by tapping on
the Contents or Search softkeys. Keep in mind that help is not always available.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
51
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Entering Text
3.10
Entering Text
Note: For additional information about tailoring text entry using the soft keyboard, the
transcriber, the block recognizer and the letter recognizer, refer to “Input” on
page 107.
You can enter text using either the soft keyboard or the EP10 keyboard. You can also use the
Transcriber to handwrite information directly on the touchscreen using your stylus.
Open an existing document or create a new one– tap Start>Office Mobile>Word
Mobile and tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new document.
If you’re using the EP10 keyboard to enter text, there are no special steps. Just begin typing
– the text, spaces, etc. will appear in the document.
•
3.10.1 Soft Keyboard
The soft keyboard is laid out just like the keypad on a PC keyboard. By tapping the stylus on
letters and modifier keys like the [SHIFT] key, you can enter text in a document.
Sof t Keyboard
Sof t Keyboard Icon
If the soft keyboard is not already displayed:
• Tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.
• Tap on the keys in the soft keyboard to enter text in your document.
To switch to a numeric keyboard:
•
•
52
Tap on the 123 key in the upper-left corner of the soft keyboard.
Tap on this key again to return to the standard keyboard.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
The Transcriber
3.10.2 The Transcriber
To access the Transcriber, with your document opened:
Tap on the arrow next to the keyboard icon, and choose Transcriber from the popup menu.
• Review the introductory screen. It provides some shortcut symbols you can draw on
your screen to work with the Transcriber.
• When you’ve finished reading the introductory screen, tap OK.
The Transcriber menu and icon bars are displayed at the bottom of the document.
•
Figure 3. 5 Transcriber Screen
Transcriber Icon
• Use your stylus to write a few words anywhere on the screen.
After a few seconds, your words are recognized (or not) and are transcribed into typed text.
Note: Character recognition is more successful if you write using large letters.
Editing Text within the Transcriber
With your document open, make certain that you are in transcriber mode–the Transcriber
icon should be displayed in the lower-right corner of the softkey bar.
•
Double-tap to select a word or triple-tap to select a paragraph, or
Draw a line through the text you want to select and wait a few seconds until the Transcriber highlights the text.
•
Once the text is highlighted, write the new text that is to replace the highlighted information, or
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
53
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
Press and hold the stylus on the selected text to display a pop-up menu. Choose Cut,
Copy, Paste or Clear (delete).
Note: You can also use the softkey bar tools or the shortcuts listed in the introductory
screen to help you edit a document within the Transcriber.
3.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
While the Transcriber attempts to recognize natural handwriting and transcribe it, Block
Recognizer and Letter Recognizer attempt to teach you how to conform your handwriting to
what the EP10 can recognize.
Block Recognizer
•
Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose
Block Recognizer.
Input Panel
Recognizer Icon Bar
Input Icon
There are two points to remember when using Block Recognizer. First, limit your writing to
the Block Recognizer input panel–do not write in the body of the document. Second, write
only uppercase letters with your stylus.
•
•
54
Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer
screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be
recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form
a recognizable letter.
In the Block Recognizer panel, write letters to the left (abc) and numbers to the right
(123) on the input panel. Remember to write using uppercase letters–they will be
printed on the screen as lowercase unless you follow the step below to create an uppercase letter.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5
Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer
•
•
To create an uppercase character, draw a line straight up the ‘abc’ panel.
Use the Recognizer Icon Bar to move around the screen, add spaces, special characters,
and so on.
Letter Recognizer
•
Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose
Letter Recognizer.
Input Panel
Recognizer Icon Bar
Input Icon
There are two points to remember when using Letter Recognizer. First, limit your writing to
the Letter Recognizer Input Panel–do not write in the body of the document. Second, write
only lowercase letters with your stylus.
•
•
•
•
Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer
screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be
recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form
a recognizable letter.
To create an uppercase character, write a lowercase letter on the left side (ABC) of the
input panel.
To create a lowercase character, write a lowercase letter in the middle (abc) of the
input panel.
Write numbers on the right side (123) of the input panel.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
55
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
PROGRAMS
4.1 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.2 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3 ActiveSync® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3.1 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4 Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.5 Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.6 Office Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1 Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1.1 Workbook Components . . . . . .
4.6.2 OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3 Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3.1 Data Entry Modes . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3.2 Sharing Documents with your PC
4.6.4 PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 File Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
60
61
61
67
68
68
68
69
4.8 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.9 PTSI Imager Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.10 Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection . . .
4.10.2 Using Internet Sharing . . . . . . . .
4.11 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.1 Creating a Note . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
4.11.3 Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.4 Recording Notes. . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.5 Synchronizing a Note . . . . . . . . .
4.12 Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.1 Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10 . . . . . .
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
70
70
70
71
71
72
74
74
75
75
75
77
57
Preliminary Draft
4.12.3 Opening a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.4 Deleting a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.5 Editing a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.6 Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.7 Using the Video Recorder . . . . . . . .
4.13 Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server. . . . .
4.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session
4.13.3 Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 77
. 78
. 78
. 78
. 79
. 80
. 81
. 81
. 81
. 82
4.15 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.16 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.17 Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.1 Browsing Web Sites . . . . . . . . .
4.18 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.1 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook .
4.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings .
4.19 Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
. 82
. 83
. 84
. 84
. 84
. 86
. 87
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Programs
4.1
Programs
The Programs menu provides access to all the applications available on your EP10.
• Tap on Start>Programs to display this screen.
Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.
Figure 4. 1 Programs Tabs
4.2
Games
Your EP10 is equipped with a few standard games – Bubble Breaker and Solitaire – should
you feel the need to pass the time.
4.3
ActiveSync®
For PCs using the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, ActiveSync® – Microsoft PC
connectivity software – can be used to connect the EP10 to PCs running this software. By
connecting the EP10 to a PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync
on the PC, you can view EP10 files, drag and drop files between the EP10 and the PC,
connect to the Internet, and so on.
4.3.1
Synchronization
For details about synchronizing your PC with you EP10, visit the following Microsoft internet site:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/activesync/default.mspx
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
59
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Calculator
4.4
Calculator
Tapping on Start>Programs>Calculator displays a standard calculator.
•
4.5
Use your stylus to tap the calculator buttons.
Demo Scanner
The Demo Scanner icon is used to test how the EP10 reads and writes bar codes. The Demo
Scanner dialog box contains buttons at the bottom of the dialog box that allow you to Scan,
Reset or change bar code Setting.
4.6
Office Mobile
This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs: Excel Mobile, OneNote
Mobile, PowerPoint Mobile and Word Mobile. Keep in mind that if Office Mobile is listed
in your Start menu, this icon will not be displayed in the Programs window.
4.6.1
Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet program.
If you’re familiar the Excel application on your PC, you’ll be able to navigate Excel Mobile.
In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics, percentages, using formulas that perform calculations, and so on, this program can also include
graphics such as pie charts.
Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your EP10 and
update them while you’re away from your desk.
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Excel Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
Excel Mobile.
•
•
60
If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, you’ll need to create a new
workbook. To create a workbook:
In Excel Mobile, tap the Menu>File>New.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
4.6.1.1 Workbook Components
Columns
Address of select ed t ext
Ent ry bar
Cell
Rows
St at us bar
Toolbar
Select ed cell
Formula drop-down menu
Sheet 1 drop-down menu
Menu bar
• If the toolbar is not visible, tap on the View>Toolbar.
You can enter data, work with rows and columns and create formulas as you would when
working with Excel on your PC.
Using Excel Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display Excel Mobile help files:
•
•
4.6.2
Launch the Excel Mobile program.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
OneNote Mobile
You can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your
notes with a notebook section in the OneNote version on your PC. For example, you can:
•
•
•
Snap pictures of business cards on your EP10 and then bring them into OneNote on your
PC.
Create short text notes and voice recordings on your EP10 to remind you about important meetings, ideas, etc. and synchronize them with your notes.
Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to your EP10 where it
will be available to you wherever you and your EP10 go.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
61
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
Important: Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 and the latest
version of ActiveSync installed on your PC before you can set up a partnership between your EP10 and your PC.
ActiveSync can be installed from the Getting Started CD included with your
EP10. Refer to “The Getting Started CD” on page 15 for details.
Setting Up A Partnership
• Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync on your PC
• Connect the EP10 to your PC; you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection.
When a connection is established between the EP10 and your PC, ActiveSync displays a
New Partnership screen.
•
•
•
Choose Standard partnership, and tap on Next.
To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2007 on your PC,
tap Synchronize with this desktop computer, and then tap on Next.
Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between the EP10 and the PC. Now you’ll be
able to pass notes back and forth between your PC and your EP10.
Creating A Note
•
62
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile>OneNote
Mobile icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
If this is not the case, tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile icon. Tap on the
OneNote Mobile icon.
•
Tap on New to create a note page. Begin typing.
•
When you complete your note, tap on Done.
Note: Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing, add Formats (Bold,
Italic, Underline, Strikethrough), include Lists (Numbered, Bulleted, Clear)
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
63
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
Using the OneNote Menu
Tapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile
applet.
•
•
•
64
Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy and Paste: These commands operate in the same way as they
do in any Windows Office application.
Format: Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your
note: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough and Clear All.
Take Picture: When you tap on this option, the EP10 switches to camera mode so that
you can snap a picture to include in your note.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
Press [ENTER/Power] to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note.
•
Insert Picture: Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures
folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
65
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
OneNote Mobile
•
Insert Recording: When you tap on this command, a recording panel is displayed.
Cancel
Save
Play
St op
Record
Tap on the Record button to record your message.
Tap on Stop when you’ve completed your message.
Tap on Play to listen to your voice message.
To discard your message, tap on X – the Cancel button.
To save your message, tap on OK. An audio icon is displayed in your note. You can tap
on it to listen to your message.
Synchronizing EP10 One Note With PC OneNote
• Connect the EP10 to your PC using either a USB cable or Bluetooth.
When the connection is complete, take one of the following steps:
66
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Word Mobile
•
In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC, choose Sync.
or
On your EP10, tap on Start>ActiveSync, and then tap on Sync.
During synchronization, the notes you created on your EP10 are copied to a new Office
OneNote 2007 notebook called OneNote Mobile on your PC. When synchronization is
done, you can drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your
PC.
Note: If you prefer to synchronize EP10 notes automatically, you can set up ActiveSync so
that synchronization is continuous or occurs on a schedule. In ActiveSync on your
PC, in the Tools menu, tap Options, and then tap on the Schedule tab.
4.6.3
Word Mobile
If you’ve used Microsoft Word on your Mac or PC, Word Mobile will be familiar to you.
Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory.
Note: Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your EP10.
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Word Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
Word Mobile.
If you’ve already create a Word document, it will be listed in the Word Mobile window.
•
Tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new Word document.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
67
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
PowerPoint Mobile
Using Word Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display Word Mobile help files:
•
•
Launch the Word Mobile program.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
4.6.3.1 Data Entry Modes
In addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer or Transcriber. Refer to “Entering Text” on page 52 for details.
You can also use the EP10 keyboard for data entry.
4.6.3.2 Sharing Documents with your PC
Documents created on a PC are recognized by your EP10. However, some formatting is lost
when a Word document is converted to a Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs
when you open a .doc file and change it on the EP10.
Important: To avoid problems, you can work on copies of .doc files. In addition, keep in
mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to log onto a
desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services, and then you can use
any program on your PC, including Microsoft Word (rather than Word
Mobile). Refer to “Remote Desktop Mobile” on page 80 for details.
4.6.4
PowerPoint Mobile
PowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC. To
launch this program on your EP10:
• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>PowerPoint Mobile.
If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on
PowerPoint Mobile.
Using PowerPoint Mobile Help
If you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help
files. To display PowerPoint help files:
•
•
68
Launch the PowerPoint Mobile program as described above.
Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
File Explorer
4.7
File Explorer
Windows Embedded 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible
through File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner
as you would on any desktop PC.
Important: Refer to “Managing Files and Folders” on page 44 for details about this
program.
4.8
Getting Started
For information about the Getting Started applet, refer to “The Getting Started Centre ??” on
page 19.
4.9
PTSI Imager Demo
Note: This icon is only available when an HHP 5000 imager is installed in your EP10.
To run a demonstration of the Teklogix Imager applet features:
•
Tap on Start>Programs>PTSI Imager icon.
Important: For details about this applet, refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers
Applet”.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
69
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Internet Sharing
4.10
Internet Sharing
This option allows you to use your EP10 to connect your PC to the Internet. Before you can
use Internet Sharing, you must make certain that you have established a data connection on
your EP10.
4.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection
Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection.
You’ll need the following information before you begin:
From your cellular service provider: data connectivity information, access point name and
PAP/CHAP security settings.
From your Internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider: access point name
and password and any additional security information.
For a GPRS, 1xRTT or dialup connection:
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection.
Type a name for the connection, and choose Cellular Line (GPRS), or for 1xRTT connections, choose Cellular Line. Tap on Next.
Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider, and
tap Next.
Type the credentials supplied by your service provider, and tap Finish.
4.10.2 Using Internet Sharing
•
Make certain that your data connect is running, and that you can access the Internet
from the EP10.
If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC, you will need to disable the ActiveSync
USB connection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
70
On your PC, open the ActiveSync window, and tap on File>Connection Settings.
Disable Allow USB connection by tapping in the checkbox to the left of this option.
Connect the EP10 to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable.
On your EP10, tap Start>Programs>Internet Sharing.
Choose the PC Connection type – USB or Bluetooth.
Choose the network connection that the EP10 should use to connect to the Internet.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Notes
Tap Connect. It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection. (If you are
prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Yes.)
If your are using a Bluetooth connection, execute the following steps on your PC:
•
•
•
•
4.11
Tap Start>Control Panel>Network Connections.
Right-click on Bluetooth Network Connections, and click on View Bluetooth
Network Devices.
If the EP10 is listed as a Network Access Point, choose Connect. If it is not listed,
choose Create a new connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add the EP10
to the list.
Notes
The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly.
You can enter text using the soft keyboard, the EP10 keyboard, or you can write on the
screen using your stylus. You can also record a message.
Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.
•
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Notes to launch this application.
If a blank Note like the sample screen here is not displayed, tap on New in the softkey
bar.
4.11.1 Creating a Note
•
Choose an entry mode for your note.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
71
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
To enter text with the soft keyboard, the Transcriber, the Block or the Letter Recognizer, tap
the stylus on the arrow to the right on the soft keyboard icon
to choose your text
input method.
To use your stylus to handwrite on the screen, tap on the pen icon
Important: Refer to “Entering Text” on page 52 for text entry details.
• Compose your note using the method you’ve chosen.
• Tap on OK when you’re done.
Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you used the
keyboard–otherwise, it’s named Note1, Note2 and so on.
4.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
When you use the pen tool, you can write notes in your own handwriting and keep them as
is, if you like. You can also teach the EP10 to recognize your handwriting and convert it into
printed text.
To convert handwriting into text:
72
•
Tap on the pen tool
and compose a note using your stylus.
•
Tap on Menu>Tools>Recognize.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.
Note: To convert only a specific portion of your handwritten note into printed type, tap
the stylus just before the first letter of the text, pause for a second, and then drag
your stylus across the text you want to select. Then, tap on Tools>Recognize to
convert only the highlighted text.
Failed Conversions
The Recognize tool sometimes gets the conversion wrong. If some words are not
converted properly:
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the incorrectly converted word.
In the pop-up menu, choose Alternative to display a list of possible alternatives to the
incorrectly converted word. Your handwritten version is displayed along the top of
the menu.
Figure 4. 2 Incorrect Conversions
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
73
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Renaming a Note
•
•
Tap on the correct word in the list.
If the correct word is not listed, as is the case in the sample screen above, tap on the soft
keyboard icon
to display the soft keyboard, and type the correct word.
4.11.3 Renaming a Note
Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename.
In the pop-up menu, choose Rename/Move, or
Tap the file name to select it, and tap on Menu>Rename/Move.
•
•
In the Name field, type the new name, and tap OK.
4.11.4 Recording Notes
It’s sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you’ve
captured an idea before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:
•
•
Tap on New to open a fresh note.
Tap on Menu>View Recording Toolbar.
Volume
Skip t o end
Skip t o beginning
Record
St op
Play
Progress
Indicat or
•
•
•
•
74
Tap on the Record button–a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record.
Begin speaking into the microphone on the EP10, or move the EP10 to within a few feet
of the source of the sound you want to record.
Tap on the Stop button when you’ve completed your recording.
Tap on OK to save the note.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Synchronizing a Note
A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within
the note.
•
To play the recorded note, tap on the speaker icon.
4.11.5 Synchronizing a Note
Like Tasks, Contacts and so on, the Notes program can be synchronized with Outlook on
your PC. In this way, all notes, recordings and drawings created in the Notes program are
copied to your PC and can be edited in Outlook’s Notes module.
To review the steps required to synchronize a note, with a Note page opened, tap on
Start>Help.
Follow the steps in the EP10 help file to synchronize your note.
•
4.12
Pictures & Videos
The Pictures & Videos applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage. It is
also a photo and video viewing program.
Important: The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats.
Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they
are transferred to the EP10.
4.12.1 Using the Camera
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
75
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Using the Camera
Keep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your EP10 as yet, you’ll only see the
Camera icon in this screen.
• Tap on the Camera icon to activate the camera.
The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at. (The camera is built into the
back of the EP10.)
Phot o File Icon
Indicat es t he camera
is act ive.
Tapping on t his sof t key
displ ays t humbnails of
phot os st or ed on t he EP10.
•
Frame the image in the EP10 screen. Press [ENTER/Power] to snap the photograph.
Photo Menu
When the camera is activated, tapping on Menu displays a set of commands to help you
modify how your camera operates, the quality of the photos it takes, and so on. You can also
use this menu to activate the video recorder rather than the still camera.
76
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Moving Photos to the EP10
Note: ‘Video’ is a toggle command. When the still camera is activated, ‘Video’ is available
in this menu. When the video recorder is activated, ‘Still’ (camera) is available in
this menu.
4.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10
•
•
Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.
On your PC, using Windows Explorer (right-click My Computer and click on Explorer),
drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device>My Pictures folder.
4.12.3 Opening a Photo
•
To open a photo, tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos. You’ll see a thumbnail
of your photos.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
77
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Deleting a Photo
•
Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo.
Note: If you’ve stored your photos on a storage card, you’ll need to tap on the storage card
icon to display your photos.
4.12.4 Deleting a Photo
•
•
Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up
menu. Tap on Delete.
Confirm your choice when prompted.
4.12.5 Editing a Photo
• Tap a thumbnail photo to open it.
• Tap on Menu>Edit.
The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools are now
listed in the Menu.
4.12.6 Creating a Slide Show
To view a slide show:
• Tap on the Menu>Play Slide Show.
The slide show begins–in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five seconds, one
after the other.
78
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Using the Video Recorder
•
To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.
Pause
Play
Flip View
Previous
Next
Close
4.12.7 Using the Video Recorder
•
Tap on the Camera icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
79
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Remote Desktop Mobile
•
In the bottom-right corner of the camera screen, tap on Menu>Video.
•
Press [ENTER/Power] to begin recording.
Video Recorder Icon
Indicat es t hat video
is act ive.
•
To end the video, press [ENTER/Power] again, or tap on the Stop softkey.
Note: When the ‘Video’ recorder is activated, a Menu is available to tailor the operation of
the recorder, the quality of the recording, and so on.
4.13
Remote Desktop Mobile
This program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop programs from the server on your EP10.
80
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Connecting to a Terminal Server
4.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Remote Desktop Mobile
In the Server dialog box, type the Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address, or
choose a server from the drop-down menu.
Tap on Connect.
In the Remote Desktop Connection window, type your user name, password, and
domain (if required). Tap on OK.
4.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session
Important: These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal Services screen used to access the PC’s commands. Do NOT use the Start menu
on your EP10.
•
•
In the Remote Desktop Connection window, tap on Start>Shutdown.
Tap on Disconnect>OK
4.13.3 Ending a Session
•
•
In the Terminal Services Client screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.
Tap on Log Off>OK.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
81
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Search
4.14
Search
4.15
•
Tap Start>Programs, and then tap on the Search icon.
•
•
In the Search for field, type the item for which you’re looking.
To narrow your search, tap on the Type drop-down menu and choose from a list of preexisting programs. To search through all files, leave this option at All Data.
Task Manager
Refer to “Task Manager” on page 145 for details about this applet.
4.16
Tasks
This program helps you stay ahead of your schedule by managing your tasks, appointments,
and so on. For details about Tasks, refer to “Task Notification” on page 37.
4.17
Internet Explorer
Note: Internet Explorer is available from the Start menu by default. If you prefer it only be
accessed from the Programs window, tap on Start>Settings, tap on the Menus icon
and uncheck Internet Explorer.
82
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Browsing Web Sites
You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways: by connecting the EP10 directly to the Internet or by connecting through your PC while the EP10 is attached via ActiveSync (see
“ActiveSync®” on page 59).
4.17.1 Browsing Web Sites
There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that
found on your EP10, sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer. You can enter
URLs, set a ‘home page’, turn images on and off, e-mail links to friends, and so on.
To go to a web site:
•
Connect your EP10 to the Internet. (If you’re not certain how to do this, tap on
Start>Internet Explorer to display a blank window. Next, tap on Start>Help and
follow the steps listed.)
• Tap on Start>Programs>Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer.
If Internet Explorer is listed in the Start menu rather in the Program screen, tap
on Start>Internet Explorer.
•
Tap on the address bar – the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered – to
highlight the current URL.
• Type a new URL in the address bar.
Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen display Internet Explorer commands like those you find on your PC.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
83
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Messaging
4.18
Messaging
Note: Messaging is available from the Start menu by default. If you prefer it only be
accessed from the Programs window, tap on Start>Settings, tap on the Menus icon
and uncheck Messaging.
The Messaging program is used to send and receive e-mail on your EP10. To send and
receive e-mail, you’ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3
(POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server.
For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one exception –
Outlook e-mail accounts are set up by default.
4.18.1 Folders
If you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with your EP10. You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize
additional folders. The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server.
For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link between
the messages on the EP10 and the copies on the mail server are broken. When you next connect, the mail server will recognize that the messages are missing from the EP10 Inbox
folder and delete them from the server, preventing duplication of messages. Keep in mind
however that you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from
anywhere except with the EP10.
For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the
server, making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from
your EP10 or your PC.
4.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
By synchronizing the EP10 Messaging program with Outlook on your PC, your e-mail is
available on both the EP10 and on your PC.
Note: Synchronizing e-mail does not require that the EP10 have an independent connection to the Internet.
84
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
•
In ActiveSync on your PC, tap on Tools>Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen.
• Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail. Tap on OK.
Once you check E-mail for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as
part of the general synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with ActiveSync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on
your EP10.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
85
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Changing Synchronization Settings
4.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings
•
In ActiveSync on your PC, double-tap the E-mail item in the Sync Options tab.
•
Tap on the Select Folder button.
•
Add a checkmark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with
your EP10, and tap on OK.
The E-mail Synchronization screen is displayed again.
•
•
86
If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to Include file attachments. To limit the size, tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a size in the KB box.
Tap on OK.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: Programs
Windows Media
4.19
Windows Media
Windows Media allows you to play music and videos on your EP10. You can use Windows
Media to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your EP10 or on the Web.
•
•
To work with this applet, tap on Start>Programs>Windows Media.
To find detailed instructions about this option, tap on Start>Help, and in the list of help
files, tap on Use Windows Media Player Mobile.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
87
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
SETTINGS
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.3 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.4 Buttons Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Up/Down Control . . . . . .
5.4.2 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 One Shots. . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . .
5.4.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . .
5.4.6 Scancode Remapping. . . . .
5.4.7 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . .
5.5 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Input Method Tab. . . . . . .
5.5.1.1 Word Completion . .
5.5.2 Options–Additional Choices .
5.6 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 98
. 98
. 99
. 99
.101
.102
.103
.106
.107
.108
. 112
. 112
. 113
5.7 Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.7.1 Start Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.8 Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.9 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.10 Sound & Notifications
5.10.1 Sounds. . . .
5.10.2 Notifications.
5.11 Today Screen . . . . .
5.11.1 Appearance .
5.11.2 Items. . . . .
5.12 System Tab Settings. .
. 116
. 117
. 117
. 118
. 118
. 118
. 119
5.13 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
89
Preliminary Draft
5.14 About Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.15 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15.1 Battery Power . . . .
5.15.2 External Power . . . .
5.15.3 Intensity . . . . . . .
5.16 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . .
5.16.1 Choosing a Certificate
5.17 Clock & Alarms . . . . . . . .
120
120
121
121
122
124
124
5.18 Customer Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.19 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.20 Error Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.21 GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.22 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.23 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.23.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.23.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping .
5.24 Managed Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
134
135
137
5.25 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25.1 Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25.2 Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26 Power Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.1 Battery Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.2 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.3 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.4 Built-In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.5 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
5.26.7 Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.27 Regional Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
138
138
138
139
139
140
141
141
142
143
143
5.28 Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.29 Screen Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.30 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
90
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
5.31 Teklogix Error Handling Service
5.31.1 ErrorLogInfo . . . . .
5.31.2 NetLog . . . . . . . .
5.32 Teklogix Imagers Settings. . . .
.147
.147
.148
.149
5.33 Scanner Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu .
5.33.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . .
5.33.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . .
5.33.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.4 Ports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5:).
5.34 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile. . . . . . . . .
5.34.2 Restoring a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.35 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.35.1 Advanced Interface And Network . . . .
5.35.2 Advanced Services Settings. . . . . . . .
5.35.3 Radio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.35.4 User System Setting. . . . . . . . . . . .
5.35.5 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.36 Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.150
.151
.152
.152
.153
.154
.154
.156
.157
.158
.160
.161
.164
.164
.165
.166
.167
.168
.169
.169
5.37 Connections Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
5.37.1 Navigation Bar Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
5.38 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
5.39 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . .
5.39.1 The Devices Tab . . . .
5.39.1.1 Pairing a Device
5.39.2 Bluetooth Mode . . . . .
5.39.3 Bluetooth COM Ports . .
5.39.4 Outgoing Port . . . . . .
5.39.5 Services . . . . . . . . .
5.39.6 Active Connections . . .
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
.172
.173
.175
.176
.177
.178
.178
.179
91
Preliminary Draft
5.39.7 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.40 Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.40.1 Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.40.2 Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.41 Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . .
5.41.1 Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.41.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings . . . . . . . . .
5.42 Wireless Manager Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components . . .
5.42.2 Setting Up a Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.3 Network Adaptor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.5 VPN Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.6 Managing an Existing Connection. . . . . . . . . .
5.42.6.1 Editing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name . . .
5.42.7 Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.8 Proxy Server Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.42.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings
5.43 Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
180
180
182
183
184
184
185
188
189
189
190
190
192
192
193
193
193
194
195
196
197
5.44 Wireless WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.1 Softkey Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.2 Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.3 Disconnecting from a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.3.1 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface
5.44.4 Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.4.1 Entering a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.4.2 Error States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5 Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5.1 Data Connection Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5.2 Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5.3 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5.4 Driver Mode Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.5.5 Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.6 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.44.6.1 New SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
197
198
199
199
199
199
200
201
201
205
206
207
207
209
210
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
5.44.6.2 Inbox . . . . . . . .
5.44.6.3 Outbox . . . . . . .
5.44.6.4 SMS Configuration
5.45 Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . .
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
.210
. 211
.212
.213
93
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Settings
5.1
Settings
The Settings screen is divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections.
•
Tap on Start>Settings to display this screen.
Figure 5.1 Set t ings Tabs
5.2
Personal Settings
The Personal tab allows you to tailor the general behaviour of your EP10 such as defining
input methods, Start menu options, owner information, password assignment, sound specifications, and so on.
5.3
App Launch Keys
The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then
launch the application from a single key-press.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
95
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
App Launch Keys
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the App Launch Keys icon.
To assign an application key:
96
•
Tap the Add button.
•
Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is
pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
App Launch Keys
The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the
application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse
through the information in your EP10 until you locate the application you want to launch.
• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.
The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to define special parameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can
leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to
launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an
application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word Mobile application,
you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.
•
Tap on OK.
•
If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this
final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save you Application Launch Key.
To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.
•
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
97
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Buttons Icon
5.4
Buttons Icon
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Buttons icon to display your options.
Note: The ‘Program Buttons’ option is not available on the EP10.
5.4.1
Up/Down Control
Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats
while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time.
Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an [Up/Down] button repeats
when pressed. Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.
98
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Sequence
5.4.2
Sequence
This slider determines the allowable pause between alpha key presses on a keypad.
For example, suppose you want to type the letter ‘c’ – you would need to press the [2] key
three times. With the [ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause
between key presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically. Moving the
Sequence slider to the right increases the pause time between alpha key presses.
5.4.3
One Shots
The options in this tab allows you to determine how modifier keys on your EP10 behave.
For each modifier key – [ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE] – you have the
following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
99
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
One Shots
Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on
the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’
until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key
is pressed.
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. If you choose this option and press
the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you choose OneShot/Lock and then press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
Show Modifier Key State
When you enable Show modifier key state, a shift-state indicator icon
replaces the soft
keyboard icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. When a modifier key is pressed,
a square in this icon is highlighted. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon with a black frame around it.
100
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Keyboard Macro Keys
5.4.4
Keyboard Macro Keys
Macro keys are not labelled on the keypad. However, you can map up to 12 macro functions
using the keyboard remapping function described in “Scancode Remapping” on page 103. A
macro has 20 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys
including [ENTER/Power] and [BKSP], function keys, and arrow keys.
Recording and Saving a Macro
In the Macro menu, highlight a macro key number–for example, macro 1 to assign a
macro to macro key [M1]. Tap on the Record button.
A Record Macro screen is displayed.
•
•
Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and
numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
101
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Unicode Mapping
• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on Stop Recording.
A new screen – Verify Macro – displays the macro sequence you created.
•
•
Tap on the Save button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is listed in the
Macro screen.
Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.
Executing a Macro
•
Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro to execute it.
Deleting a Macro
•
•
5.4.5
In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.
Tap on the Delete button.
Unicode Mapping
•
Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen.
The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL]
and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character
along with the Unicode value. For example, “a (U+0061)” indicates that the character “a” is
represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual
key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the
Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.
102
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Scancode Remapping
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Unicode
Mapping tab by tapping on [OK].
•
Tap on the Add/Change button.
•
•
Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.
Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the
highlighted key.
Note: To add a shifted state – [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT
Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’.
Removing Unicode Values
•
5.4.6
In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap the
Remove button.
Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has
a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be
remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents
the [ENTER/Power] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
103
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Scancode Remapping
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and
the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines
key presses that occur when the [BLUE] modifier is on; the Orange table defines key
presses that occur when the [ORANGE] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab.
The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal.
If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column
labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third
column labelled ‘Function’.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns
remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number
(e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
•
104
Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Scancode Remapping
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.
•
Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode.
Note: The ‘Label’ field displays the default function of the scancode you
are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code
will be remapped to: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the
virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift
state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
•
•
Choose Virtual Key>Function or Macro.
Choose a function from the Function list, and tap on OK.
Editing a Scancode Remap
•
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
105
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Lock Sequence
Removing a Remap
•
•
5.4.7
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on
the Remove button.
Tap on OK.
Lock Sequence
The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the EP10 keyboard to prevent keys from being
pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
•
To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.
Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone
attempting to use the EP10 keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter
to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
•
•
•
•
106
If you want the keyboard to be locked at startup, tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard
locked at startup. Otherwise, leave this option disabled.
In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will use to lock and
unlock the keyboard.
Tap on OK.
To lock the keyboard, type the key sequence you chose – for example, Orange-Blue-0.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Input
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
Locked Keyboard
Icon
•
5.5
To unlock the keyboard, type the key sequence again.
Input
The Input icon provides access to text input options you can use to tailor the soft keyboard,
block recognizer, letter recognizer and transcriber along with voice recording options.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
107
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Input Method Tab
5.5.1
Input Method Tab
•
Tap on Start>Settings and then on the Input icon to display your options.
A drop-down menu next to Input method allows you to tailor your methods of input – Block
Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer and Transcriber.
Block Recognizer
Block Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the EP10
can recognize.
Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 54 for additional details.
108
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Input Method Tab
Keyboard Options
This screen is displayed when you choose Keyboard in the Input method drop-down menu.
You can use it to customize the soft keyboard. You can choose Large Keys or Small Keys to
increase or decrease the size of the keys displayed on the soft keyboard.
If you enable Use gestures for the following keys, these keys are removed from the soft keyboard. Gestures are handwriting shortcuts for the keyboard keys. Before you can enable this
option, you’ll need to tap on the radio button to the left of Large keys.
Letter Recognizer Options
Letter Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the EP10
can recognize.
Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 54 for additional details.
To display additional letter recognition options, tap on the Options button in the Letter Recognizer screen.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
109
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Input Method Tab
Figure 5.2 Let t er Recognizer Quick Set t ings
These options allow the Letter Recognizer to better interpret any specialized strokes and
accents you may wish to use.
Transcriber Options
Note: Before you can display the Options for Transcriber, you need to select Transcriber
as the active input method. Tap on the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon in the
taskbar, and choose Transcriber.
When you choose Transcriber as the input method, three tabs of options are available to you
– Quick Settings, Inking and Advanced.
Quick Settings
The Quick Settings tab allows you choose the writing direction–the icons indicate direction.
In addition, you can choose to enable or disable the display of the Introductory screen and
the sound each time you launch the Transcriber.
110
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Input Method Tab
Inking
In the Inking tab, you are presented with a number of options. Recognition Delay allows you
to determine the time delay between writing something on the Transcriber screen and its
recognition into printed text.
Enabling Add space after automatically adds a space after each word you write. The Pen
option allows you to choose the line Width and Colour. Finally, tapping on Match Letter
Shapes to your writing displays a screen in which you can learn how to form letters to help
the EP10 to recognize the most often used characters.
Advanced
In this tab, Shorthand allows you to create a shortened word that the Transcriber will recognize and expand into a complete word automatically. You can also insert data such as a date
or run a program.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
111
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Options–Additional Choices
5.5.1.1 Word Completion
This tab speeds the writing process regardless of the input method chosen. When you begin
entering a word, this option displays what it assumes is the complete word, saving you
having to type the word in its entirety. You can also tailor how and when you want word suggestions made.
5.5.2
Options–Additional Choices
This tab offers a few choices including choosing a voice recording format, zoom percentage
for writing and typing, automatic capitalization of the first letter in a sentence and automatic
scrolling when you’ve reached the bottom of the screen.
112
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Lock
5.6
Lock
To protect the data stored in your EP10, you can assign a password that must be entered each
time the unit is switched on.
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Lock icon.
It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you forget it, a ‘clean start’ must
be performed by certified Psion Teklogix personnel. A clean start returns the EP10 to
factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or SD memory card are preserved.
•
•
•
•
•
Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if device unused to turn on password protection.
Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to
enter your password.
In the Password type drop-down menu, choose the type of password you prefer to
assign. Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters. Strong
alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the
following: uppercase and lowercase alpha characters, numbers and punctuation.
Tap on the Hint tab to enter a word or phrase that will remind you of your password.
The EP10 will display the hint after the wrong password is entered five times.
Tap on OK. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save you password settings.
Tap on YES to save your password assignment.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
113
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Menus
5.7
Menus
The Menus icon allows you to display options to customise the Start Menu.
•
5.7.1
Tap on Start>Settings and then tap on the Menus icon.
Start Menu Tab
This tab allows you to define the items that will be listed in your Start menu.
• In the Start Menu dialog box, tap on the items you want to appear in your Start menu.
The checked items will be listed in your Start menu.
114
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Owner Information
5.8
Owner Information
Tapping on Start>Settings and then tapping on the Owner Information icon allows you to
add your personal information to the EP10. Some of this information will be displayed in the
desktop Today screen.
Important: Refer to “Ownership Information” on page 36 for details about this option.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
115
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Phone
5.9
Phone
Tapping on Start>Settings and then tapping on the Phone icon allows you to adjust phone
settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls, and you
can also determine network selections.
Important: Refer to “Managing Phone Settings” on page 39 for details about
this option.
5.10
Sound & Notifications
The Sounds & Notifications icon allows you to specify when your EP10 will emit sounds.
116
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Sounds
5.10.1 Sounds
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Sounds & Notifications icon to display this
dialog box.
•
Tap in the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event(s) that will cause your unit
to emit a sound.
5.10.2 Notifications
Tap here t o play
your ring choices
Tap here t o end
t he ring t est
This tab allows you to determine how you are notified about different events.
•
•
Choose an event from the Events drop-down menu.
Choose the Ring type and Ring tone. Tap on the arrow below Ring tone to test your
choices. The small square button stops the ring test.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
117
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Today Screen
5.11
Today Screen
This option allows you to tailor the appearance of the Today screen – the desktop screen.
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Today icon.
5.11.1 Appearance
This screen allows you to customize the background displayed on the Today screen.
•
Choose the background you want to use from the list.
5.11.2 Items
This tab allows you to choose and to sort the item(s) that you want listed in the Today screen.
118
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
System Tab Settings
•
•
5.12
Tap in the checkbox to the left of the item(s) you want displayed in the Today screen.
To rearrange the list of items, highlight the item you want to move up or down and tap
on the Move Up or Move Down button. Keep in mind that the Date cannot be moved.
System Tab Settings
To display the icons grouped in the System tab:
•
5.13
Tap on Start>Settings, and tap on the System tab.
About
Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab, and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs
that provide device information.
Version Tab
This tab outlines the Windows Embedded 6.5 version, processor information, memory size
and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.
Device ID Tab
This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description (optional)
for the EP10. This name is used by the EP10 to identify itself to other devices.
Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to connect
to a network because another device with the same name is already connected, you’ll need
to assign a new name here.
Copyrights
The Copyright tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your EP10.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
119
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
About Device
5.14
About Device
Tapping on the About Device icon under Settings>System tab provides access to three tabs
related to your EP10. The Properties tab lists hardware information related to your EP10.
The Copyrights tab lists the copyrights that apply to your EP10. The Experience tab allows
you to choose a category to help you define your Experience. These categories include Microsoft settings, Psion Teklogix settings and Custom settings in a drop-down menu. Each
category contains a group of default settings. If you change a default setting, the category is
automatically changed to Custom settings.
5.15
Backlight
• Tap on Start>Settings, then tap on the System tab. Tap on the Backlight icon.
Tapping on the Backlight icon allows you to determine the power properties of the EP10.
5.15.1 Battery Power
This tab allows you to tailor the EP10 backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life.
•
•
120
To define how long the backlight should stay on when the EP10 is not in use, tap in the
checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if device is not used for.
Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes the backlight will remain on when the EP10 is idle.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
External Power
•
To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped, tap in the
checkbox to the left of this option.
5.15.2 External Power
This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the EP10 is using external rather
than battery power.
Important: Refer to “Battery Power” on page 120 for details about these options.
5.15.3 Intensity
This tab is used to adjust the light intensity of the display backlight and the keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises
the intensity.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
121
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Certificates
5.16
Certificates
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the Certificates
tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the submitter. The EP10 checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification
authority that the EP10 explicitly trusts.
Your EP10 has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Personal certificates establish
your identity, Intermediate certificates, as the name suggests, identifies intermediate certification authorities and Root certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you
can connect.
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab.
Tap on the Certificates icon.
Personal Tab
The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
•
•
122
To view additional information about a personal certificate, tap on a certificate in
the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a popup menu is displayed. Tap on the Delete command.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Certificates
Intermediate Certificates
The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities.
Root Certificates
•
•
•
To view details about a certificate – who issued the certificate, to whom it was issued,
the issue date and the expiry date – tap on a certificate in the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the certificate you want to delete.
In the pop-up menu, tap on the Delete command.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
123
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Choosing a Certificate
5.16.1 Choosing a Certificate
Normally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the
EP10. If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically, you must choose it from the Certificates list.
•
5.17
To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. Your EP10 will connect
automatically.
Clock & Alarms
Located under Start>Settings>System tab, the Clock & Alarm icon allows you to set the
current date and time, and it allows you to define up to three alarms.
Important: Refer to “Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm” on page 34 for details about
setting up these options.
5.18
Customer Feedback
This option allows Microsoft to track how you use your EP10 so that they can make improvements to the software. The radio buttons allow you to turn this feature on or off.
124
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Encryption
Note: If you want to make this option inaccessible, go to Start>Settings and tap
on the About Device icon. In the Experience tab, remove the checkmark to
the left of Enable Customer Feedback and SQM (reset required). As indicated, you’ll need to reset the EP10.
5.19
Encryption
This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
125
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Error Reporting
•
5.20
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Encryption icon.
Error Reporting
Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
•
126
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Error Reporting icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System)
5.21
GPS (Global Positioning System)
With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact position on a
map. However, even without a GPS receiver, several different mapping programs can run on
your EP10.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>GPS icon.
•
Tap on the GPS program port drop-down menu, and choose the communication
(COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.
Note: Your EP10 may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter
the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, you’ll need to enter this information yourself. You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
127
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
•
Tap on the Hardware tab, and choose a GPS hardware port and the appropriate
Baud rate.
Windows Embedded 6.5 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However, some
programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:
•
Tap on the Access tab, and disable Manage GPS automatically (recommended).
You can go to www.microsoft.com/pocketstreets if a map-viewing program is not included
with your EP10, and copy the file to your EP10.
5.22
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the
GPS module can draw power and under what conditions, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can also set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System).
128
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>GPS Settings icon.
Power Tab
This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down
menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off.
•
•
•
•
Off – the GPS module is left off, always.
Always on – the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of
the EP10 (suspend or standby).
On, and off in suspend – the GPS module is powered on, but if the EP10 is in suspend
mode, the GPS module is turned off.
On, and low power in suspend – the GPS module remains in a low-power state while the
EP10 is in suspend mode.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
129
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
Profiles Tab
Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate
profile: Default, Automotive or Pedestrian.
•
•
•
130
Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses.
Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as
the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an
area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the
vehicle position.
Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes
into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user.
When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where
satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will not attempt to predict the operator’s movement.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) Tab
To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites
in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the
time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas
– outdoors, for example. However, if you’re attempting to triangulate your location in city
centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS
module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix.
AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping
a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to the EP10 periodically through WiFi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used
by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix.
Update
Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure
host on the internet using any interface that has an internet connection (WWAN or
WiFi). These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be
used if the satellite’s broadcast ephemeris is not available.
The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once
successfully downloaded, the Status field will read Idle.
•
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
131
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
Settings
•
Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings.
The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings: Use default settings and Use custom settings.
The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside
from the Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your EP10, the
field values cannot be edited.
The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access
only to an intranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of
qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. They will be able to help you configure your Psion Teklogix device(s) and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.
132
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Manage Triggers
Info Tab
This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version,
the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is required, you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to
Psion Teklogix support staff.
5.23
Manage Triggers
Manage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and doubleclick, and the double-click time.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
133
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Trigger Mappings
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Manage Triggers icon.
5.23.1 Trigger Mappings
A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or
application, the module(s) – sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)” – of the trigger
source. Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external hardware triggers or software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer
(for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings — for example
[F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice — even if the
trigger type is different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key
data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used
as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to
applications.
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between
0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger Press Type” on page 136.
134
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Trigger Mappings
Show All Modules
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or
applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this
checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Add
Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog (see below), so that you can add new
trigger mappings.
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog, so that you can edit existing trigger
mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the
[ESC] key is pressed, all changes are discarded.
5.23.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping
•
Tap on Add to add a new trigger map, or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Grip
Trigger, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
135
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Trigger Mappings
Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers) – for
example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially
with devices such as Imagers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to
this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
Trigger Press Type
You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally,
when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to
the “owner” – that is, the application receiving the trigger press information – followed by a
“trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released,
and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will occur. If a mapping with the Up/down
type has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of
trigger events.
Module to Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Show All Modules
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both
active and inactive, are displayed.
136
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Managed Programs
5.24
Managed Programs
Managed Programs lets you view, download and install applications that are deployed by
the System Center Mobile Device Manager (a server-side solution that helps enable IT to
have control of their device deployment with respect to security, management and access to
the corporate network). To access Managed Program:
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Managed Programs icon.
Note: Your system administrator can provide the details you’ll need to use Managed Programs effectively.
5.25
Memory
This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation. To display
the options for this applet:
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Memory icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
137
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Main Tab
5.25.1 Main Tab
This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage.
5.25.2 Storage Card
The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with
the amount in use.
5.26
Power Icon
This icon allows you to view and manage battery use.
•
138
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Battery Tab
5.26.1 Battery Tab
This tab allows you to view the remaining battery capacity.
5.26.2 Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab allows you to manage battery consumption.
On Battery Power
When the EP10 is operating on battery power, this option allows you to determine how long
the unit will remain on when it is not in use.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
139
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Battery Details
•
Tap in the checkbox to the left of On battery power to enable this option. Tap in the
drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it
shuts down.
On External Power
When the EP10 is drawing external rather than battery power, this option allows you to determine the number of minutes the unit will remain on when not in use.
•
Tap in the checkbox to the left of On external power to enable this option. Tap in the
drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it
shuts down.
5.26.3 Battery Details
This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in the
EP10. This is a view-only screen.
140
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Built-In Devices
5.26.4 Built-In Devices
Built-In Devices
Checking the box next to Enable Bluetooth switches on the built-in Bluetooth radio.
5.26.5
Card Slots
When you select one or more of the card slots listed, power is supplied to the enabled slot(s).
Clicking on the Apply button activates your selections. Keep in mind that if the characters on
this button appear in grey typeface, the checked slots have already been enabled.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
141
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
5.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set
aside to protect data until a fully charged battery can be installed in the EP10. When the
battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the
Suspend Threshold tab, the EP10 shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the EP10. Once the EP10 shuts down, it cannot be switched on until
a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.
Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity
reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours.
• Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for
backup purposes; this increases the EP10’s operating time – the amount of time the
EP10 will operate before shutting down – but reduces the power reserved for backup
purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.
Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the EP10 while the depleted battery
is swapped for a fully charged one.
•
Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data
stored on the EP10 for approximately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install
a charged battery before this time elapses.
142
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Suspend Mode
5.26.7 Suspend Mode
When this option is enabled, any time the EP10 enters suspend mode (e.g., an idle time out,
Power button press or through the Start menu), Go to standby on suspend forces the EP10 to
enter Standby mode. In Standby mode, applications, processors and services (e.g., Bluetooth) continue to run even while the EP10 is powered down, making them instantly
available when the unit is powered up again.
5.27
Regional Settings
To display the Regional Settings screen, tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System
tab followed by the Regional Settings icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
143
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Remove Programs
• Tap on the drop-down menu to choose your language and region.
Once you’ve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way numbers, currency, the time and the date appear in your EP10.
•
5.28
Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item should be
displayed on your EP10.
Remove Programs
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Remove Program icon.
Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be
removed from your unit.
•
5.29
To remove a program, highlight it and then tap on the Remove button.
Screen Icon
This icon allows you to align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn ClearType on and off and
adjust the size of the text displayed on the EP10 screen.
144
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Task Manager
•
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab, and then tap on the Screen icon.
Important: Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 20 for details.
5.30
Task Manager
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of options to manage these.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
145
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Task Manager
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon – the
Task Manager screen is opened.
•
End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on
the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
Task Manager Menu
The Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications.
146
•
Tap on the Menu softkey in the taskbar.
•
Switch To: Makes the highlighted application active.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Teklogix Error Handling Service
•
•
•
•
•
5.31
End All Tasks: Shuts down all applications listed.
View: Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes.
Sort By: Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size,
CPU or application or process Name.
Refresh: Updates the list of applications or processes.
Exit: Closes the Task Manager.
Teklogix Error Handling Service
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Teklogix Error Handling Service icon.
Teklogix Error Handling Service is an error diagnostic tool. Tapping in the checkbox next to
Enable error reporting enables this service.
5.31.1 ErrorLogInfo
•
To log an error, tap on the ErrorLogInfo tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
147
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
NetLog
• Choose an Error Level, and tap on FlushToFile to log the information file.
Psion Teklogix personnel can help you retrieve and forward the information file to our
offices.
5.31.2 NetLog
The NetLog option is used to log network traffic. When you tap in the checkbox to the left of
Enable NetLog Debug Capturing, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for evaluation. You can also define where you want
the data stored and the maximum size of the file.
148
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Teklogix Imagers Settings
5.32
Teklogix Imagers Settings
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings.
The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images.
Note: This icon is only when displayed when the HHP 5000 imager is installed in your
EP10 hand-held.
To launch this applet:
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab, and then tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon.
Important: Refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for details about this
applet.
A PTSI Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
149
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Scanner Settings
To launch the demo:
•
5.33
Tap on Start>Programs, and then tap on the PTSI Imager icon.
Scanner Settings
The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which
you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
150
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu
•
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Teklogix
Scanner icon.
5.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of
the following scanner types used with your EP10: Decoded (internal), Decoded (Intermec
ISCP) or Imager.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes
it supports.
Important: Appendix C: “Bar Codes Settings” provides descriptions of the bar codes
listed in the scanner menus.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
151
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Options Tab
5.33.2 Options Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated
with your scanner.
5.33.2.1 Double Click Parameters
Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the
time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this
feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in
the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and
initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, doubleclicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Click Data
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent
to the application installed in your EP10 following a double-click. A dialog box appears,
asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
152
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Options Tab
5.33.2.2 Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the
screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible
only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is
cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the
scanner is activated.
Scan Result Time (sec)
The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan
results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a
value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box
appears where you can enter a value.
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired,
point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.
Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep
These parameters determine whether or not the EP10 emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when
a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to
either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.
Soft Scan Timeout
This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter
determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.).
Scan Log File
If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output bar code
are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is
enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log
file is written to persistent storage.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
153
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Translations Tab
5.33.2.3 Data Handling
This option allows you to choose the code page your EP10 will use to display data – Default
Local ASCII or ISO-8859-1 Latin 1.
Codepage:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your EP10
will use.
If you choose Default Local ASCII, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if
the local OS uses double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data
through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately, in this example, using doublebyte characters.
If you choose ISO-8859-1 Latin 1, data will be displayed according to the character mapping
of this Latin 1 code page, ignoring the local OS code page.
5.33.3 Translations Tab
The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules
in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be
applied if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a case fails, the entire
case fails.
154
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Translations Tab
•
In the Translations tab, tap on a Case # to create rules.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
155
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Translations Tab
•
Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
5.33.3.1 Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
156
No rule – ignored.
Match at index – matches the match string at a specified index.
Match and replace at index – matches the match string at a specified index and
replaces/changes it.
Replace at index – replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
Add barcode prefix/suffix – adds a global prefix or suffix.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Ports Tab
•
•
Verify barcode size – verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned
first, before creating subsequent rules.
Search and replace – replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule
cannot fail.)
Warning: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into
account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is
important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size
are applied.
The information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see “Scan
Log File” on page 153) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.
5.33.4 Ports Tab
While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a
serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
157
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Ports Tab
5.33.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5:)
Enabled
This parameter allows you to turn this port on (enable) and off.
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate baud rate.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte.
Most devices use 8 bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window
in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.
158
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Ports Tab
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the
tether port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can
choose the appropriate Parity.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous
communication.
Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence
If a SICK scanner connected to the EP10 port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger
the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off, the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger
Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
159
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Total Recall
Double-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a
hex array of 10 elements.
These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data
streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, supposed you launch Manage
Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger
key’ – for this example, a period (‘.’). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the
on and off function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the
Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is
sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the
trigger key on and off.
5.34
Total Recall
Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to back up/restore applications and
settings.
Note: In Windows Embedded 6.5, the registry and installed programs are stored in the
Flash file system and are not lost on reset. However, in special cases, Psion Teklogix
personnel may find it necessary to perform a ‘clean start’; this will reset not only
the registry settings to factory defaults but will also erase any files or applications
stored or installed on the built-in Flash file system, including any Total Recall profiles. This is why any data that needs to be protected must be stored on a microSD
card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.
160
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Creating a Backup Profile
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Total Recall icon.
In the drop-down menu, you can choose: Create Backup Profile, Restore Selected Profile,
View Selected Profile Data, and Delete Selected Profile. Keep in mind that until a profile is
created, only one option is available – Create Backup Profile.
5.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile
•
Tap on the Next button to begin the process.
Profile Information
This dialog box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file.
•
To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
161
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Creating a Backup Profile
•
Next, choose the Profile Type you want to create:
- For this device only – creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.
- AutoRestore for this device only – creates a profile that automatically restores itself
following a cold start.
•
•
Finally, choose a Profile Location.
Tap on the Next button to display the next dialog box, Add Files.
Add Files
By default, All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries and the
registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to Databases, the Registry and/or
Selected Files.
•
162
Tap on the Next button to view your selections.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Creating a Backup Profile
View Selections
Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a list of all
files, selected files, databases, and/or the registry.
•
If you’re satisfied with the items in the profile, tap on Next.
Performing the Backup
• Tap on Backup to begin the process and create a profile.
When the backup is finished, a dialog box is presented stating that the backup has been completed successfully.
•
Tap on Finish to exit Total Recall.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
163
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Restoring a Profile
5.34.2 Restoring a Profile
To manually restore a profile:
•
•
5.35
Choose Restore Selected Profile from the drop-down menu, and choose the Profile
Name you want to restore.
In the next screen, tap on Restore to restore your profile.
TweakIT
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network
and servers), User settings (font size and docking port message), and provides a
Registry Editor.
164
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Advanced Interface And Network
5.35.1 Advanced Interface And Network
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol, version 6, that has been published to use
128-bit IP address (replacing version 4).
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, the EP10 logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem
commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
165
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Advanced Services Settings
5.35.2 Advanced Services Settings
FTP Server
This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in
either direction is restricted to the Temp folder – that is, data are always loaded from the
FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server.
If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize EP10 time with that
of the time server. A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered.
166
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Radio Features
5.35.3 Radio Features
AP Density
This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the EP10 radio will begin
searching for a new Access Point (AP): High, Medium or Low. If this option is set to High,
the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong signal
strength. Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal strength is
significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point.
Depending on your site configuration – for example, the shelving, the Access Point coverage, etc. – a higher setting may improve through-put, increase and maintain signal strength,
and reduce missed transmissions.
Radio Power Management
When this option is enabled, access points that support it will use Radio Power Management
guidelines to control the EP10 radio. Access points determine how often the EP10 radio
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
167
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
User System Setting
enters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption. Another
benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled, even when no activity is detected, the access point does not disassociate the EP10.
5.35.4 User System Setting
Docking Port Message
Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the EP10
is docked.
168
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Registry Editor
5.35.5 Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry
keys and values. Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the EP10.
5.36
Windows Update
This program checks for software updates, and if found, downloads updates to your EP10.
You can choose to have updates checked automatically, or if you prefer, you can determine
when your unit will check for updates.
5.37
Connections Tab
This tab is used to setup connections using Bluetooth and 802.11 radios.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
169
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Navigation Bar Hotkeys
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab to display your connection options.
Navigat ion Bar
Tap on t hese connect ivit y hot keys
t o display Not if icat ion Bubbles
Not if icat ion Bubble
5.37.1 Navigation Bar Hotkeys
Some of the connectivity icons in the Navigation Bar along the top of the screen are hotkeys
that offer shortcuts to connection setups. Tapping on a hotkey displays a bubble that provides information about your connections and provides a shortcut to the Wireless Manager
applet where you can set up your connections.
Automatic Notification
The Navigation Bar also displays notification icons to let you know, for example, that a
network as been detected. or if your EP10 is equipped with a phone, that you’ve missed a
call, a voice mail or a text message.
170
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Navigation Bar Hotkeys
Automatic Network Detection
If a wireless network is available when you switch on your hand-held, a notification bubble
may appear letting you know which networks have been found. You can choose a network
from here.
Net work Det ect ion
Icon
Tapping on Connect in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen will automatically connect
to a network that’s already been set up. Tapping on Settings in the network bubble will
launch the Wireless Manager applet.
If you prefer not see this notification bubble, you can tap on the Menu button in the softkey
bar, and choose not to display the notification bubble.
Multiple Notifications
If more than one item is detected, all the items can be accessed by tapping on the small multiple notification icon shaped like a word bubble in the Navigation Bar. Tapping on it
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
171
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Beam
displays a group of notification icons – in the sample screen below, a missed call icon and a
new voice message icon.
Mult iple Not if icat ion Icon
Missed Call Icon
New Voice Message Icon
Tapping on any of these icons displays an associated notification bubble with information
about and access to the missed call(s) or voice message(s).
5.38
Beam
This option is not available for the EP10.
5.39
Bluetooth Setup
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended
for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that
operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a
10 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a
radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
•
172
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Bluetooth icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
The Devices Tab
5.39.1 The Devices Tab
This tab allows you to scan for other Bluetooth enabled devices, and it allows you to
pair devices.
Note: You may need to enable your Bluetooth radio before you begin. Refer to “Bluetooth
Mode” on page 176 for details.
To add a new device:
• Tap on Add new device....
The EP10 scans for a Bluetooth device within a 10 meter range. Any Bluetooth devices
within range appear in the Bluetooth list box
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
173
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
The Devices Tab
•
Highlight the device you want to add. Tap on Next.
• If required, type your Passcode. If not, skip this step and just tap on Next.
A pop-up message lets you know that your device has been connected to your EP10.
174
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
The Devices Tab
•
To change the Display Name, tap on the Advanced button. This is an optional step.
•
Tap on Save.
Note: To connect to a Bluetooth-equipped device that’s already been added, tap on the item
in Bluetooth list box.
5.39.1.1 Pairing a Device
If you intend to pair devices (a headset, for example), power on and bring the device within
10 meters of the EP10 before proceeding with the discovery process described below.
Important: Follow the steps under “Pairing a Bluetooth Headset” on page 25 to pair a
Bluetooth a headset with your EP10.
If you prefer, you can go to the Today screen, and tap on –
Getting Started>Set up Bluetooth – to get pairing information.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
175
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Bluetooth Mode
5.39.2 Bluetooth Mode
•
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab following by the Bluetooth icon. Next,
tap on the Mode tab.
When Turn on Bluetooth is checked, Bluetooth features are available. If this option is disabled, you cannot send or receive information using Bluetooth.
When Make this device visible to other devices is enabled, other Bluetooth devices within
range (approximately 10 meters) can detect your EP10 and can establish a bond or use a
Bluetooth service. Note that other devices can detect your unit whether or not a bond has
been created.
176
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Bluetooth COM Ports
5.39.3 Bluetooth COM Ports
New Outgoing Port
When you pair the EP10 with another device, New Outgoing Port is listed in this dialog box.
Tapping on this option allows you to assign an outgoing COM port number.
• To work with an existing COM port number, tap and hold the stylus on an existing port.
To assign a new port number, make certain that your EP10 is connected to the other device
via Bluetooth.
•
•
In the COM Ports tab, tap on New Outgoing Port.
Choose a COM port number from the list.
Note: If a port cannot be created, the number you’ve chosen is already in use. Choose a different port number.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
177
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Outgoing Port
5.39.4 Outgoing Port
Outgoing Port acts as a serial port that can be used to connect to a list of Bluetooth
devices (one at a time). This tab allows you to assign and enable an outgoing port and
choose the device with which you want to communicate from the list. You can also tailor
the behaviour of your EP10 so that you are prompted to choose the device with which you
want to communicate.
5.39.5 Services
The Bluetooth Services tab is used to assign a virtual serial port for incoming Bluetooth (serial) communications. Virtual ports are required because while normally, an application uses
a true COM (hardware) port to transmit data, Bluetooth uses a virtual port.
178
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Active Connections
You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP (Bluetooth
Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in
order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used. (In Windows
Embedded 6.5, the COM Ports tab is used to assign a virtual outgoing COM port to a
Paired Bluetooth service, and the Outgoing Port tab is used to assign multiple
outgoing Bluetooth services to a single virtual port.)
5.39.6 Active Connections
This tab displays the currently active Bluetooth connections, listing the device name(s). The
type of link is also included with the device name(s). Keep in mind that the information
listed in this tab is ‘view only’; it cannot be edited.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
179
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
About Tab
5.39.7 About Tab
The About tab displays information about the Bluetooth module, such as the manufacturer
name, local address and version. Like the Active tab, this information cannot be edited.
5.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
Once you’ve completed the Bluetooth settings, you can go ahead and set up communication
through your Bluetooth-equipped phone.
Before you begin, make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on, that the Bluetooth
radio in your EP10 and in your phone are switched on, and that the EP10 and phone are
within 10 metres of each other. Both should be discoverable.
1. Tap on Start>Settings and then tap on the Connections tab.
2. Tap on the Connections icon. Tap on Add a new modem connection.
180
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
3. Type a name for the connection.
4. Tap on the Select a modem drop-down menu, and choose Bluetooth. Tap on Next.
5. Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to be pairable
in order to accept a bonding request. Refer to your phone documentation for additional information.
6. If the phone appears in the My Connections list, skip to step 12.
7. In the list, tap phone and then tap on Next.
8. In the PIN screen, type a personal identification number (PIN) – you can enter up to
16 characters.
9. Enter the same PIN on the phone.
10. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field.
11. Tap on the Finish button.
12. In the My Connections list, tap on the phone and then on Next.
13. Enter the dial-up phone number for this connection, and tap on Next.
14. In the User name, Password and Domain fields, enter the logon information for this
connection, and tap on Finish.
You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connection, for example, to send and receive email, browse the Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
181
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Connection Properties
5.40
Connection Properties
This applet is used to set up serial modem connections.
182
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Connection Properties icon
•
Choose a connection from the drop-down menu, and tap on Edit Properties.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Port Settings
5.40.1 Port Settings
Baud Rate
In the Baud rate drop-down menu, choose a new baud rate. Check your modem documentation for the appropriate baud rate.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port. Possible
values are: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the
port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous
communication.
Flow Control
This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held. The EP10 can
perform Software or Hardware handshaking, or you can choose None.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
183
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Call Options
5.40.2 Call Options
Cancel Call If Not Connected Within
Tap in the checkbox to enable this option to make certain that the EP10 does not stay online
too long while waiting to connect with a network.
Enter the number of seconds after which the call will be cancelled.
Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing
To speed connection when using a modem, disable this option – tap in the checkbox to the
left of this option.
Wait For Credit Card
If you are paying for calls with a credit card, enter the number of seconds you want the EP10
to wait for a credit card prompt.
Extra Dial-String Modem Commands
Type your credit card number in this field.
5.41
Connections – Connecting to the Internet
To activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment is installed in your
EP10 such as a radio.
You’ll need the following information from your ISP to make an internet connection:
•
•
•
184
ISP server phone number,
user name, and
password.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
1. Tap Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.
2. Tap on the Connections icon.
Note: In the Connections window, the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and
manage existing ones. The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network. If you
need to change these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator before
making changes.
3. Under My ISP, tap on Add a new modem connection.
4. In the Select a modem drop-down menu, choose a modem connection. If you
haven’t already created a modem connection, refer to “Modem Connection Setup”
on page 185.
5. To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For example, launch
Internet Explorer on your EP10 to browse the Internet. Your EP10 automatically
connects.
Note: To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add a new connection under My Work Network.
5.41.1 Modem Connection Setup
Before you begin, you’ll need the following information from your ISP or network administrator: telephone number, password, domain name, and TCP/IP settings.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
185
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
If your EP10 does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card in
the unit.
1. Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
2. To create a new connection in either My ISP or My Work Network, tap on Add a
new modem connection.
3. In the Make New Connection screen, type a name for the connection.
4. In the drop-down menu under Select a modem, tap on your modem type.
Note: If your modem is not listed in the drop-down menu, choose Hayes Compatible
on COM1.
5. Tap on the Next button.
186
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
6. In the next screen, enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. If, for
example, you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at the beginning of the
phone number.
7. Tap on the Next button.
8. Type the User Name, Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or
network administrator.
Note: Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings. For information
about the Advanced settings, refer to“Advanced Modem Settings”
Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:
To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit card options.
To change port settings.
To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not
dynamically assign addresses.
9. Tap on the Finish button.
If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” in the
next section.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
187
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Modem Connection Setup
5.41.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings
TCP/IP Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
If you need to make changes, contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses.
Server Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP
addresses. The EP10 supports a variety of name resolution options: DNS, Alt DNS, WINS
and Alt WINS.
Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need, and can
also provide the server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate addresses are
available. An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is
not available.
188
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Wireless Manager Icon
5.42
Wireless Manager Icon
The Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager, providing access to Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS and GSM/GPRS settings.
Important: The ‘Wireless Manager’ option provides detailed Help files to assist you in
setting up your EP10. Help is available from the Connections tab – not
from within the Wireless Manager dialog box.
To access Wireless Manager help files, tap on Start>Settings>Connections
tab. Tap on Start>Help.
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Wireless Manager icon.
•
To access radio Settings, highlight a radio in this dialog box, and tap on the Settings
button.
To turn off a radio, highlight the radio and tap on the Disable button.
•
5.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components
To disable all wireless components when, for example, you are taking your EP10 onto a
plane where wireless connections need to be shut down:
• Tap on the Disable All button.
To enable wireless components:
•
Tap on Enable All.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
189
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Setting Up a Network Card
To disable a particular radio connection rather than all connections:
•
Highlight an Available (enabled) radio listed in this dialog box, and then tap on the
Disable button.
5.42.2 Setting Up a Network Card
Network (802.11) cards are used to connect to a network so that you can browse the Internet,
download e-mail and so on. You can connect to an existing network, or you can set up a new
connection on your EP10.
Important: The EP10 is equipped with context sensitive Help Files. If you find that
you’re unsure how to proceed with a network connection at any point
during setup, tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at the top
of the screen.
5.42.3 Network Adaptor Cards
Important: For 802.11b/g (Summit) CF card adaptor setup details, refer to “Setting Up
the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio” on page 21.
When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the Network Settings screen
is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card. If it does not appear, or if you
want to change settings:
•
190
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Network Adaptor Cards
•
Tap on the Network Cards icon.
•
If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate adaptor, and
then tap on the IP Address and/or Name Servers tab.
Note: Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these settings
unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.
•
•
If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your network. Refer to
the documentation shipped with your network card for details.
To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet Explorer). The
EP10 will connect automatically.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
191
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Changing Network Card Settings
5.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings
•
•
•
If you use your network card in two locations such as work and home, you’ll need to
change the network to which the network card connects.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Network Cards icon.
In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box, tap on the drop-down menu under My
network card connects to, choose either The Internet or Work.
5.42.5 VPN Connection Setup
A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.
Before you begin, you need the following information from your network administrator:
password, domain name, TCP/IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap on Add a new VPN server connection.
In the Name field, type a name for this connection.
In Host name/IP, type the VPN server name or IP address.
Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for your EP10:
IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. Your network administrator will let you know which option
applies to your hand-held.
Tap on Next.
Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose A pre-shared key, type
the key provided by your network administrator.
Tap on Next.
Type your user name, password and domain name. If a domain name was not provided to you, try the connection without entering a domain name.
Note: Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will need to make
changes only under only the following circumstances:
The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses, and
TCP/IP settings need to be entered.
Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.
If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” on page 188
for details about this tab.
•
192
Tap on Finish.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Managing an Existing Connection
•
Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The VPN connection will start automatically.
5.42.6 Managing an Existing Connection
Once you’ve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first Connections screen–
Manage existing connections.
5.42.6.1 Editing a Connection
•
•
Tap on Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.
Tap on Manage existing connections.
Tap here
•
•
To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the connection you
want to activate. Choose Connect from the pop-up menu.
To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete.
Choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
Note: You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button. To make changes
to the settings for this connection, tap on Edit.
5.42.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name
Your EP10 has two sets of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. If you want
to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you, follow these steps.
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network or My ISP, tap on Manage existing connections.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
193
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Selecting a Network
•
Tap on the General tab.
•
•
Type the name you prefer in the field labelled Enter a name for these settings.
Tap on OK.
5.42.7 Selecting a Network
Important: Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your ISP or
network administrator before making any changes.
Private networks are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for home
connection to your ISP. The My Work Network settings are used for private network connections (corporate networks), while My ISP settings are used for Internet network connections.
When you use programs such as Internet Explorer, your EP10 automatically connects using
private network settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP, depending on specifications. You can determine how your EP10 connects.
•
194
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Proxy Server Setup
•
Tap on the Advanced tab.
•
•
Tap on Select Networks.
In the appropriate lists, choose My ISP or My Work Network.
5.42.8 Proxy Server Setup
Note: If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization, the
EP10 will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your PC.
If these settings are not on your PC, or if they need to be changed, you’ll need to set
up the proxy server connection manually.
To set up the proxy server connection manually, you’ll need the following information:
proxy server name, server type, port, type of Socks protocol used, and the user name and
password.
•
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
195
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Proxy Server Setup
•
Under My Work Network, tap on Set up my proxy server.
•
Add a checkmark next to This network connects to the Internet and This network
uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet.
In the Proxy server field, type the proxy server name.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
•
•
Note: If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type,
you’ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK. Advanced
settings are described in “Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings” on page 196.
5.42.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings
•
196
To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type, tap on the
Advanced button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Wireless Statistics
•
•
5.43
Wireless Statistics
•
•
5.44
Tap on the proxy type you want to change. For the appropriate server type, type the
proxy server name and port.
Tap on OK.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Wireless Statistics icon to display the communication statistics of your wireless connection along with the radio card name, MAC
address, driver version and NDIS Compliance information.
Tap on the Zero button to reset the statistics.
Wireless WAN
An EP10 equipped with a UMTS radio has wide area networking data transfer capabilities.
5.44.1 Softkey Bar Icons
Wireless WAN icons in the softkey bar indicate the status of your wide area network connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS, CDMA/1xRTT or
UMTS radio is installed in the unit, and the interface is enabled.
The letter in the signal strength icon (G for GSM/GPRS, U for UMTS and X for
CDMA/1xRTT) indicates that a packet data service is available and initialized. Keep in
mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not
available or if it is available but not yet initialized.
User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).
A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.
GSM/GPRS Status Indicators
Signal strength is between 1% and 20%.
Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.
Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.
Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.
Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
197
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Establishing a Connection
A GPRS packet data connection is active.
CDMA/1xRTT
Signal strength is between 1% and 20%.
Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.
Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.
Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.
Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.
A CDMA/1xRTT packet data connection is active.
5.44.2 Establishing a Connection
•
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Wireless WAN icon.
Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to “Entering a PIN” on page 199
for details.
The Status field indicates when the unit is ready to connect–the Connect Data button
is enabled.
• Tap on the Connect Data button.
The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.
•
198
PPP link to modem active
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Disconnecting from a Network
•
•
•
Authenticating user
User authenticated
Connected
Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the
connection is rapid.
When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the softkey bar icon changes
to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes, displaying Disconnect.
5.44.3 Disconnecting from a Network
To disconnect from the network:
• Tap on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.
When the EP10 network connection is severed, the Status field displays Ready to Connect.
A unit equipped with a GSM/GPRS expansion board displays the signal strength in the main
Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. Units equipped with certain other
modems (e.g. Sierra Wireless UMTS and CDMA modems, Novatel UMTS modems) do not
display the signal strength while a connection is active.The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received, respectively.
5.44.3.1 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface
While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this
by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command in the Wireless WAN screen.
Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by tapping
on the Wireless WAN icon to display the dialog box.
5.44.4 Advanced Information
In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your EP10, setup is automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing a Connection” on page 198
to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.
5.44.4.1 Entering a PIN
If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.
•
Type your PIN, and press [ENTER/Power].
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
199
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Advanced Information
Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to
the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.
Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to
perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN
dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.
• Searching for modem
• Initializing modem
• SIM is ready
• Searching for network
• Registered on network
• Searching for packet data
• Ready to connect
If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated:
Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data and Ready to
connect.
5.44.4.2 Error States
The following temporary error states–states that may disappear without interaction– may be
displayed:
• Emergency calls only
The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agreement
between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.
• No network found
A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.
• Packet data not available
The current network does not support packet data.
• Packet data not allowed
The modem is not allowed to use packet data on the current network (e.g. no packet data
roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place).
It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for packet data at all.
The remaining error states are permanent:
•
200
SIM is missing
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a reset may be required.
• SIM failure
The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered too
many times). A new SIM is needed.
• Modem failure
The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a reset does not clear this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.
• NDIS error
An internal software error has occurred. If a reset does not clear this condition, Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further.
5.44.5 Tools Menu
The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced
setup features.
5.44.5.1 Data Connection Configuration
Enable Automatic Connect
If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless
WAN user interface will attempt to establish a packet data connection whenever packet data
is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction).
To activate the automatic connection mode:
•
Tap on the OK button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
201
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless
LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto.
To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic connection mode:
•
Tap on Disable Auto.
Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than
the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected to
open and close connections.
If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes
the packet data connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try
to re-establish the connection.
Use Virtual Serial Port
If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the
virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly. This
checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network)
clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled
(unchecked).
Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.
Enable Automatic Configuration
In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the
same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is
detected (this may require a reset). The connection parameters are retrieved from a database.
Manual configuration should be necessary only if:
•
•
•
•
202
One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the
database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)
An operator has assigned individual packet data user names and passwords.
A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be
configured manually.
A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be
configured manually.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
Important: For CDMA/1xRTT, automatic configuration is not available – connections must be configured manually. Under APN, the packet service access
number must be entered (typically “#777”).
In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such
as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a profile. Every
profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special in
that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. (A sample dialog box is presented on the page following.) The Default profile uses parameters from a built-in database.
The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While
there can be many configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time.
If connection profiles are configured manually then the Enable automatic configuration:
checkbox should normally be unchecked.
In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic
configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being
from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured
profile for each SIM card. For this to work each profile has to be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM is
ready).
The Select profile drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects which profile a
subsequent action applies to. A profile named Default is always present and contains the
current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:
•
•
•
•
Show – The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap on this
button. For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown – otherwise, the
password is hidden.
Edit – The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit
button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.
Delete – The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.
Activate – When this button is chosen, the selected profile is made the active profile.
Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is
unchecked.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
203
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
•
New – Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile.
The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the
name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a
unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a
secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN
has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box
and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will
be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button
in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected).
•
204
Reset – The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all
entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
•
Advanced IP – The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog
boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well
as the IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS and WINS resolvers.
5.44.5.2 Security Configuration
The Security Configuration dialog box is called up through the Tools menu.
Note: Security configuration is not available with CDMA modems.
The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN.
You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in
order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)
Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled. A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.
The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. While the checkbox remains unchecked, any PIN entered
on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to
the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is
then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as
resume after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in
the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
205
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox
should be checked. In this case, you will be prompted whenever a PIN is required and the
PIN is not stored.
5.44.5.3 Network Configuration
Note: Network configuration is not available with CDMA modems.
In the main Wireless WAN screen:
• Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.
By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed
networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the
home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which
you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming
if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign
roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have
packet data roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network
which you know to support packet data roaming.
Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is
disabled, you must select a network manually.
Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operation – a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For
every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identifier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code) is
displayed.
Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have
roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it
does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers packet data.
A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a
network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN
dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not
available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.
206
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
5.44.5.4 Driver Mode Configuration
By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked).
The driver must be disabled in order to access the modem directly (e.g. dial-up data, fax, or
in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development, testing, approvals, etc.). In most cases, the Virtual WWAN serial port can be used and it is not necessary to
disable the WWAN driver. If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut
down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box tapped.
If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver checkbox is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is
closed using the OK button.
Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can be
displayed.
Since all currently supported modems are automatically detected, the Enable automatic port
detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a serial port
can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM
modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth. An
external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hardware flow control.
5.44.5.5 Modem Information
The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited – they only display information about the
EP10 modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into the
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
207
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Tools Menu
SIM, the Phone field remains empty. The modem serial number is called IMEI for GSM
modems and ESN for CDMA modems.
The SIM ID is sometimes referred to as the ICC ID (International Charge Card Identifier).
Not all modems support the retrieval of the SIM ID. In particular, the Novatel Merlin UMTS
modems and the Option Globetrotter modems do not support SIM ID retrieval.
If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may
be available.
Modem Power Modes
The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power icon rather than through the
Wireless WAN user interface.
To adjust PC Card and CF card modems settings:
• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon.
• Tap on the Built-in Devices tab.
If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, power is not applied to the modem and a driver
is not loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is
checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the EP10 is turned
on. Power is removed from the modem when the EP10 enters suspend mode.
To enable a modem module that is built into the unit:
• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon.
For a modem module that is built into the EP10, the settings can be found under the Built-in
Devices tab. In this case, one of the following power modes can be selected:
• Disabled – No power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded.
• Enabled – Off in Suspend
Power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the EP10 is turned on.
Power is removed from the modem when the terminal enters suspend mode.
• Enabled – Always On
When the EP10 enters suspend mode, the modem remains powered indefinitely.
•
•
•
•
•
208
Enabled – Keep on for 5 min
Enabled – Keep on for 15 min
Enabled – Keep on for 30 min
Enabled – Keep on for 1 hour
Enabled – Keep on for 2 hours
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
SMS Menu
When the EP10 enters suspend mode, the modem remains powered. If the EP10 is not
turned on again during the configured time, the unit briefly wakes up from suspend mode,
shuts down the modem, and enters suspend mode again. The default mode is Enabled Keep on for 1 hour.
At the cost of a slightly increased power consumption in suspend mode, the modes where
the modem remains powered during suspend mode have several advantages. When the
EP10 wakes from suspend mode, the modem is ready immediately; modem or network initialization is not required. A packet data session can thus remain active during suspend
mode. In these modes, the modem is also able to wake up the EP10 if the network status
changes, or there is a new incoming SMS.
5.44.6 SMS Menu
SMS functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a SIM card,
the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
209
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
SMS Menu
5.44.6.1 New SMS
Tapping on New opens a dialog box for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's phone
number (to be entered in the To field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as the *
and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international number
(i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character).
By checking the Store message in Outbox field, a new message can be stored in the Outbox
before being sent. If no storage space is available or the modem does not support the storage
of outgoing messages, this checkbox is disabled.
5.44.6.2 Inbox
Tapping on Inbox opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for example,
from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted with the
210
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
SMS Menu
most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking
on the corresponding column heading.
Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Pressing any letter or digit
moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number.
Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Regional Settings in the Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect, the Inbox has to be closed
and re-opened.
The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message
can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox
message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above,
except the destination phone number is already filled in. Pressing the Delete button erases
the message.
5.44.6.3 Outbox
Tapping on Outbox opens a list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as
the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is not available for
GSM modems.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
211
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
SMS Menu
5.44.6.4 SMS Configuration
Tapping on SMS Configuration opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS Centre
Address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message dialog.
The Message Validity Period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent
subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the
message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period
regardless of the setting).
Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus, the validity period is
rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog is
opened, the rounded value is shown.
The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming
message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a
new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is deleted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, messages beginning with
that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way, messages intended
for another application running on the same device can be hidden.
212
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: Settings
Windows Update
5.45
Windows Update
This program checks for software updates, and if found, downloads updates to your EP10.
You can choose to have updates checked automatically, or if you prefer, you can determine
when your unit will check for updates.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
213
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES
6.1 Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021
6.1.2 Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020 . . . .
6.1.3 Carrying Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.219
.219
.221
.222
.222
6.3 Adaptor Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
6.4 Chargers and Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3.2 Charging a Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3.3 Operating the USB Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4 Cleaning the RV4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5.1 Docking Station does not Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5.3 EP10 Charge LED Fast Flashes Green . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5.4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Green with Battery Inserted .
6.5.5.5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted
6.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3 Quad Dock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3.2 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4 Cleaning the RV4004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
.223
.223
.224
.225
.225
.226
.226
.226
.226
.227
.227
.228
.229
.229
.229
.229
.229
.229
.230
.230
.230
.231
.231
.231
.232
215
Preliminary Draft
6.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5.1 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Fast Flashes Green . . . . . . .
6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected to a Network . . . . . . .
6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected to a 100Base-T Network
6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Quad Charger – Model No. RV3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 Charging the EP10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.3 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.4 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.5 Charging Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.6.1 Improper Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.6.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . .
6.8 Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
233
233
233
233
233
233
233
233
234
234
235
235
235
235
235
236
6.9 AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.10 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.11 The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000 . . . .
6.11.1 Important Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.3 Placing the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle. . . .
6.11.2.4 Removing the EP10 from the Vehicle Cradle
6.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . .
6.11.3.1 Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . .
6.12 The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005 . . . . . . .
6.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
6.12.1.1 Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12.2 Cable Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12.3 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle . . . . .
6.12.4 USB and Serial Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12.5 Using the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
238
239
239
239
239
239
240
240
240
242
242
244
245
245
245
246
247
248
Preliminary Draft
6.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . .
6.13 EA11 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers .
6.14 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.248
.249
.249
.250
6.15 Digital Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
217
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Carrying Accessories
6.1
Carrying Accessories
There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably
with the EP10.
Carrying Accessory
Model Number
Hand Straps
Carrying Pouch
RV6021 (with stylus and tether) - PN TBD
RV6090 leather pouch (non-functional access to DC port, includes belt clip TBD model no. & functional or nonfunctional)
Stylus Tether Kit
RV6020 (model no. TBD) stylus and tether)
Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.
6.1.1
The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021
The hand strap with tether can be attached to the back of the EP10 to provide a secure means
for operators to carry the hand-held.
Attaching the Hand Strap
The hand strap is attached by fixing the ends of the strap to the anchors located on the back
and bottom of the unit (see Figure 6.1 on page 220).
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
219
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021
Figure 6.1 At t aching The Hand St rap
Hand St rap Bar
Hand St rap
Anchor
Back of EP10
1. Attach the hand strap to the EP10 by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering
the tab to the Velcro pad (TBD).
2. Remove the bracket and screws from the EP10.
3. Slide the bracket through the plastic loop on the hand strap and install the screws.
4. Adjust the hand strap by pulling up the Velcro tab and readjusting to your hand
as needed.
Attaching the Stylus and Tether
The stylus tether can be attached to the hand strap at the back of the EP10.(TBD)
1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the
cord tight.
2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.
3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.
4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.
220
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020
6.1.2
Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020
The tether can be installed to the back of the EP10 to provide a secure means for attaching
the stylus to the hand-held. (TBD)
Figure 6.2 At t aching t he Tet her
St ylus
BACK OF UNIT
PLACE HOLDER
Attaching the Velcro Retainer
Attach the retainer to the EP10 by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering the tab
to the Velcro pad (TBD).
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
221
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Carrying Pouch
Attaching the Stylus Tether to the Retainer
1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the
cord tight.
2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.
3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.
4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.
6.1.3
Carrying Pouch
A protective carrying pouch (Model No. TBD) is available for EP10. The pouch is equipped
with a belt clip to allow the operator to safely carry the EP10 when it is not in use.
Figure 6.3 EP10 Carrying Pouch
Bel t Clip
Back of Pouch
6.2
The Battery
The EP10 operates with a 3600 mAh, Lithium-Ion battery pack.
Note: For information about inserting, removing and charging the battery, refer to “The
Battery” on page 12. For battery specifications, refer to “Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh
Battery Specifications” on page 265.
222
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Adaptor Cable Options
6.3
Adaptor Cable Options
The following are adaptors can be ordered for your EP10 (PN TBD):
Model Number
6.4
Adapt or Cable Descript ion
CA1033
Tether to USB Host.
CA1032
Tether to USB Device. (For ActiveSync)
WA4010 - G1
CH1050
USB to Ethernet adaptor.
Power cable used with quad docking station RV4004.
Chargers and Docking Stations
Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station, you must also
order the appropriate power cord separately.
Psion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the EP10. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.4.1
Snap Modules are mobile adaptor designed for the EP10. Two models are available –
USB and Charge Snap Module, Model RV4001 and DE9 RS232 and Charge Snap
Module, Model RV4002.
AC Adaptor – Model PS1050 - G1 (AC Wall Adaptor Brick RV3055)
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model RV3050
Desktop Docking Station – Model RV4000
Quad Docking Station – Model RV4004
Quad Charger – Model 3004
Important Safety Instructions
•
•
•
•
Before using the AC adaptor, Desktop Docking Station, Quad Charger, or Quad
Docking Station, read all instructions and markings on the housing.
Use the AC adaptor, batteries, and other attachments recommended or sold by Psion
Teklogix.
The mains power cord (sold separately) shall comply with the national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be used.
These docking stations cannot be used with non-EP10 PDAs. Although they may share
the same battery terminating connector, they are designed with different applications
in mind.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
223
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not operate the AC adaptor with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.
Do not disassemble the AC adaptor; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel.
Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.
To reduce the risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging a docking
station, pull the plug rather than the cord.
Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise
subjected to damage or stress.
Do not operate the AC adaptor, the RV4000, or the RV4004, if it is struck by a sharp
blow, dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified
service personnel.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet before
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper
extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used,
make sure:
- The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on
the adaptor.
- The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition, and that the
wire size is larger than 18 AWG.
•
•
•
•
6.4.2
Do not expose the AC adaptor to rain or snow. However, both the RV4000 and RV4004
are designed to accept a wet EP10 hand-held without harmful effect.
Do not place batteries in the docking stations if they are cold—temperatures below 0°C
(32°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least 30 minutes.
Do not use a docking station if after an overnight charge, the battery feels warmer than
the charger housing. The dock should be inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do not use a docking station if the battery, while charging, becomes more
than lukewarm.
Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations
When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.
•
•
224
Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and
contaminants.
Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0° C to
40 °C (32° F to 104° F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be
operated at room temperature–between 18° C and 25° C (64° F to 77° F) for
maximum performance.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Power Consumption Considerations
After unpacking your unit:
•
•
6.4.3
Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.
Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Power Consumption Considerations
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for
the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the
same circuit.
•
6.5
Quad docking station can consume up to 1.9A @ 120 VAC or 1.5 A @ 240 VAC.
Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000
Important: The RV4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It
is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
Note: To preserve battery integrity, the desktop docking station will proceed with a charge
only when the battery temperature falls between 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F).
The RV4000 desktop docking station is a desktop model designed to:
• Fast charge the internal battery.
• Fast charge the spare battery pack (see Figure 6.4 on page 226)
• Supply Type A and Type B USB connectivity to the EP10 (see Figure 6.5 on page 228).
The RV4000 storage temperature is -30° C to +60° C (-22° F to 140° F). Operating temperature and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0° C to 40°C (32° F to 104° F).
The desktop docking station provides sufficient power to concurrently support all the above
functions. The RV4000 uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life
while ensuring the shortest possible charge time. The charger supports proprietary Psion
Teklogix Smart Batteries and handles a range of voltages and charge algorithms. See “The
Battery” on page 12 for battery capacity, charge times and battery life for the EP10 battery.
See “Charging a Spare Battery” on page 227 for spare battery charge information.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
225
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operator Controls
Figure 6.4 RV4000 Deskt op Docking St at ion – Front View
PLACE HOLDER
Rear-Mount ed Spare Bat t ery
Spare Bat t ery Charge LED
St ylus
Important: This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved
Lithium-Ion batteries.
6.5.1
Operator Controls
The RV4000 has one operator control – the USB door on the rear that switches from Type A
to Type B (see “Operating the USB Dock” on page 227).
6.5.2
Indicators
The RV4000 desktop docking station is equipped with a single LED on the front panel that
indicates the charge status of the spare battery.
6.5.3
Operation
6.5.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery
The RV4000 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger. Normally, it takes
2.5 to 3.0 hours to charge the 3600 mAh battery installed in the EP10.
When the EP10 hand-held is installed in the dock, the battery charge LED on the EP10 (the
left-most LED) lights up to indicate the unit has external power and may charge the internal
battery. The EP10 charge LED follows the same convention as the RV4000 docking station
226
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operation
LED. Refer to “Charging a Spare Battery” in the next section for details about
LED behaviour.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the EP10 is switched on or off.
6.5.3.2 Charging a Spare Battery
Note: Do not store a spare battery in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may
damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.
•
Insert the spare battery in the charge well at the back of the RV4000, aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well.
A full charge takes 2.5 to 3.0 hours for the 3600 mAh battery.
When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green and remains in this state
once the battery is completely charged.
6.5.3.3 Operating the USB Dock
The RV4000 Desktop Docking Station offers a rear-mounted host or device USB connection
to the EP10. The EP10 supports communication with low- and full-speed USB 1.1 compliant devices and hosts through the docking station. The Type B receptacle may be used for
ActiveSync® among other applications typical for a Type B device (Figure 6.5 on
page 228).
•
Move the sliding door to the left or right to alternate between the Type A and Type B
USB ports.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
227
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cleaning the RV4000
Figure 6.5 RV4000 Deskt op Docking St at ion Rear View
Sliding Door
Type B USB Port
Type A USB Port
Sliding Door
DC Jack
DC Jack
Linking an EP10 to a PC
The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the
same way that you would between PC drives. A USB cable is included with your
docking station.
Note: For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through
Vista, refer to “Data Transfer Between the PC & the EP10” on page 17.
To link the EP10 to a PC:
•
•
6.5.4
Insert the EP10 in the desktop docking station.
Insert the USB cable into the docking station Type B USB connector. Attach the other
end of the cable to a USB port on the PC.
Cleaning the RV4000
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent
to wipe the unit clean.
228
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
•
•
6.5.5
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4000.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is
susceptible to harsh chemicals. It is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline
and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.
Troubleshooting
6.5.5.1 Docking Station does not Power On
•
When first connected to the DC power supply, the spare charger LED should turn ON
and remain on for 3 seconds. If this does not occur, the charger is defective and requires
service.
6.5.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off
When an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4000 and the EP10 charge indicator LED stays
off, there may be a problem with the unit or with the docking station. Use an EP10 with a
properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.
6.5.5.3 EP10 Charge LED Fast Flashes Green
If the EP10 charge LED (the left-most LED) fast flashes green when it is docked:
•
•
•
Remove the EP10 and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.
Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the EP10 LED still shows a fault, the EP10 requires service.
6.5.5.4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Green with Battery Inserted
•
•
•
Try inserting a battery that has been tested in another charger and is known to work.
If the spare charge slot LED continues to fast flash green with the known working battery, the charger is defective and requires service.
Your Psion Teklogix battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for
safety and capacity performance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or
charger are not Psion Teklogix approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the
spare charge slot LED or EP10 LED will rapidly flash green.
6.5.5.5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted
•
•
•
Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage. Are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?
Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
229
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004
•
•
6.6
Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power-up.
If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and
requires service.
Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004
Important: The RV4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It
is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The RV4004 Quad Docking Station is a desktop model designed to accept up to four EP10
PDAs. The docking station powers the EP10s and their internal battery charger. The docking
station also connects from one to four EP10s to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and
allows for Ethernet data transfer.
Figure 6.6 RV4004 Quad Docking St at ion Front View
PLACE HOLDER
6.6.1
Operator Controls
The RV4004 has no operator controls or power switch.
6.6.2
Indicators
The quad docking station is equipped with two rear Ethernet LEDs and no front LEDs.
230
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Quad Dock Operation
6.6.3
Quad Dock Operation
6.6.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery
•
Insert the DC power MINI FIT JR plug into the RV4004 rear DC input receptacle. The
adaptor LED should be ON when powered from the mains.
The RV4004 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger. Normally, a full
charge of the 3600 mAh EP10 battery will take from 2.5 to 3.0 hours.
•
•
•
Insert up to four EP10s into the docking station charge wells, pressing down gently but
firmly to seat them securely.
During the charge, the EP10 LED slow flashes green.
When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the EP10 is switched on or off.
6.6.3.2 Connecting to the Ethernet Network
The rear-mounted RJ45 connector incorporates LEDs that indicate data traffic (see
Figure 6.7) when:
•
•
•
The EP10 is in the docking station and powered on;
The docking station is powered by the AC adaptor;
The docking station is connected to Ethernet network with a Category 5 cable plugged
into the RJ45 rear socket.
The green Link LED flashes to indicate the presence of data traffic. The yellow Speed LED
is steady ON when the network is 100 Mbps and OFF when the network is 10 Mbps.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
231
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cleaning the RV4004
Figure 6.7 RV4004 Quad Docking St at ion Rear View
PLACE HOLDER
RJ45 Et hernet Port
Link LED
MINI FIT JR DC Input
Speed LED
Network Access
The EP10 automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate
drivers to communicate with the network.
Network Addressing
The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a
specific EP10 on the network.
If a link is established between an EP10 and a host, the application on the host and on the
EP10 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the EP10 is removed from the dock,
interrupting the link.
6.6.4
Cleaning the RV4004
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent
to wipe the unit clean.
•
•
232
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4004.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
6.6.5
Troubleshooting
6.6.5.1 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off
When an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4004 and its charge indicator LED stays off,
there could be a problem with the EP10 or with the docking station. Use an EP10 with a
properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.
6.6.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Fast Flashes Green
If the EP10 charge indicator fast flashes green when the EP10 is in any of the four sites:
•
•
•
Remove the EP10s and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.
Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the EP10 indicator still shows a fault, the EP10 requires service.
6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected to a Network
•
•
Check the Category 5/5e cable. Replace if the cable is suspect.
Contact your network administrator.
6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected to a 100Base-T Network
•
•
Check the Ethernet cable. Replace if the cable is suspect.
Contact your network administrator to ensure the network is running at 100 Mbps.
6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off
•
•
Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect.
If the adaptor's LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.
6.7
Quad Charger – Model No. RV3004
6.7.1
Charging the EP10 Battery
Quad Battery Charger (Model No. RV3004) can charge up to four batteries simultaneously.
6.7.2
Installation
The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031TBD) or it can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and
contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F)
(TBD). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
233
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operator Controls
maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature
– a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).
The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains
circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are
being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit:
•
•
Visually check the charger for damage.
Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion Teklogix, with the ground
pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.
All charge indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for
operation.
If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the
EP10 Quad Charger Quick Start Guide (PN TBD) included with the charger kit. Be sure to
locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the
vicinity.
6.7.3
Operator Controls
The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated
indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light.
6.7.4
Charge Indicators
Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the EP10 batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the
LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge.
Table 6.1
Charge St at us Indicat or LEDs
Charge LED Behaviour
234
Funct ion
OFF
No battery detected.
Solid Green
Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.
Flashing Green
Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging Batteries
Charge LED Behaviour
6.7.5
Funct ion
Flashing Yellow
Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.
Solid Red
Unable to read battery or non Psion Teklogix battery.
Charging Batteries
•
Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between
the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.
The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED
shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted
lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F), the
LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take from 3 to 4 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green.
When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be
overcharged if left in the charger slot.
6.7.6
Troubleshooting
6.7.6.1 Improper Battery Storage
Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not
recommended. Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for
long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in “The Battery” on
page 12.
6.7.6.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up
•
•
•
•
Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.
Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.
Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
6.7.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
•
•
•
•
Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot.
Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
235
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Snap Modules
•
6.8
Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at powerup.
Snap Modules
The Snap Module is a mobile power adaptor that snaps on the base of the EP10. Two types
of Snap Modules are available:
•
USB and Charge Snap Module – Model No. RV4001. This accessory powers and
charges the EP10, and it provides a USB connection.
• DE9 RS232 and Charge Snap Module – Model No. RV4002. This accessory powers
and charges the EP10 and provides a RS232 connection.
The Snap Modules are compatible with the AC Wall Adaptor and the Vehicle Power Outlet
Adaptor.
To attach an adaptor to the EP10:
•
•
•
Make sure that the adaptor connector and EP10 docking connector are free of dust or
any other debris before connecting them.
A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of
the adaptor. To attach the adaptor, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide
up until the locking clips snap into place. Refer to TBD illustration.
To remove the adaptor, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the
EP10 side rails and slide the adaptor off.
PLACE HOLDER
Snap Module inst allat ion illust rat ion
236
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1
6.9
AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1
The AC wall adaptor available for your EP10 allows you to operate your EP10 using AC
power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adaptor: United Kingdom, Switzerland, Japan, Israel, Australia, Europe, and North America (see
Figure 6.8 on page 237).
Figure 6.8 AC Wall Adapt or Plugs
Universal AC Power Supply
Adapt or Plugs
DC Power Plugs
•
•
•
6.10
Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug
into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled
together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of the EP10, located between
the tether and LIF ports.
Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050
Important: It is critical that you review the safety instructions outlined in the quick
start guide enclosed with your vehicle power adaptor before using
the accessory.
The vehicle power outlet adaptor allows you to power your EP10 and recharge your battery
using power drawn from your vehicle’s power outlet.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
237
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000
Figure 6. 9 Vehicle Power Out let Adapt or
Adapt or Plug
Vehicle Power
DC Power Plug
•
•
6.11
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of a snap module – Model No.
RV4001 or RV4002 (see TBD).
Insert the vehicle power outlet adaptor plug into the power outlet in your vehicle.
The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000
The RV1000 vehicle cradle is a passive device, designed to securely grip the EP10. The
cradle design permits access for the DC input cable to connect to the EP10 (see Figure 6.10
on page 239).
•
•
•
A stylus holder.
A loop for tethering the stylus.
A cable tidy for draping the power cables or storing the disconnected DC plug.
Note: Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion Teklogixapproved RAM mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-certified Psion Teklogix
mounting hardware is not recommended, and may void warranty coverage.
238
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Important Instructions
Figure 6.10 RV1000 Vehicle Cradle
Cable Tidy
Restraining Mechanisms
Stylus Well
PLACE HOLDER
Cable Pass-thru
6.11.1 Important Instructions
The RV1000 storage temperature is -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F). Operating humidity
and temperature is 5 - 95% non-condensing and -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 140°F).
6.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation
6.11.2.1 Operator Controls
The vehicle cradle has no operator controls or power switch.
6.11.2.2 Indicators
The RV1000 has no front indicators. The EP10 LED serves as the power indicator.
6.11.2.3 Placing the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle
Connect the vehicle power to the EP10 prior to inserting it in the vehicle cradle.
The vehicle cradle is designed with a front opening through which you can pass the connected cable while inserting the EP10 (see Figure 6.10 on page 239).
When placing the EP10 into the vehicle cradle, press firmly on the top of the hand-held and
the EP10 will bottom out on the cradle base. This action will make the final fit to the cradle
base to allow the rear restraining mechanism to resist vibration.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
239
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
6.11.2.4 Removing the EP10 from the Vehicle Cradle
When removing the EP10, apply slight pressure to the rear and pull upwards. The rear-first
motion will assist in disengaging the rear restraining mechanism.
6.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
Warning: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted
cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator
visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the
operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional
mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If
you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see Appendix A: “Summit Client Utility (SCU)”. Note also that for
better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll
cage.
Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal
operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking
joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle,
and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.
Important: EP10 vehicle cradles are designed to be compatible with any RAM®-B
mounting interface. For other mounting options please contact our Technical Support offices.
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the seven #M4
threaded inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 5mm into the
vehicle cradle. You may also remove the rear Ram-B mount accessory to custom mount the
vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended RAM-B (Figure 6.11 on page 241).
6.11.3.1 Mounting Template
The vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template.
Refer to the RV1000 EP10 Hand-Held Vehicle Cradle Quick Start Guide (PN 8000234).
In every case, please take the following precautions:
1. When installing the cradle, ensure the driver's view is not obstructed.
240
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
2. Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. air bags, seat
belts, etc.
3. Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result
otherwise.
4. Ensure the mounting has the capacity to hold the cradle and the EP10. Cradle plus
EP10 weight is approximately 1kg (2.2 lb.).
5. Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts. Consult Psion Teklogix
Customer Service for direction.
Figure 6.11 Removing t he RAM Mount
PLACE HOLDER
To accommodate the service loop of the power cable, leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) clearance at the
bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17.8 cm (7 in.) clearance at the top of the vehicle
cradle to allow easy removal of the EP10. When selecting a mounting location, refer to the
detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the pedestal.
Important: Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes
that product to vibration tests to ensure the EP10 will remain secure during
normal use. But as a low cost mount, the cradle will not defend against
shock if the vehicle undergoes a front or rear impact. Take care to mount
the cradle in an upright position in case of accidents.
If you choose to use a third party company-produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take responsibility for the effects of that third party product when it causes failure to our device.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
241
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle
6.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle
Important: Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.
•
•
6.12
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV1000.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.
The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005
The RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle (12-24 VDC) is designed to securely grip the EP10
when locked in and provides an easy single-handed release mechanism when the EP10
needs to be quickly removed from the cradle. The cradle design permits access for the DC
input cable to connect to the EP10 (see Figure 6.15 on page 248). The cradle is also
equipped with:
•
•
•
•
•
One USB A connector.
LED charge indicator.
A stylus holder and tether latch.
Built in speaker, identical to the one on EP10, that offers hands-free functionality. The
powered cradle detects when the EP10 is docked and can automatically transfer the
speaker function from the EP10 to the cradle.
Depending on the cradle variant, there can be up to two full RS-232 connectors.
- PN 1081148-500: no RS-232 connectors.
- PN 1081148-400: one RS-232 connector.
- PN 1081148-200: two RS-232 connectors.
The cradle comes with four mounting screws and a RV1005 Powered Cradle Quick Start
Guide (PN 8000164), with illustrated electrical and mounting instructions.
Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes that product
through a series of severe testing to ensure that it will survive in the rugged environments in
which our products are typically used. These tests usually include shock and vibration
testing as well as IP testing for water and dust, electrical shock, etc.
If a third party vehicle mount is used, the third party should perform the same type of testing
in order to ensure that the design will maintain the factory specifications of the product. If
the third party company is unwilling to perform the necessary testing and take responsibility
242
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005
for the effects of the design, then we highly recommend using Psion Teklogix designed and
supported accessories.
If you elect to use a third party company produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take responsibility for the effects of that third party product if it causes failure of our device.
Important: Before using a vehicle cradle, read all instructions and markings on
the housing.
Do not operate a vehicle cradle if damaged by a sharp blow, dropped, or
otherwise damaged in any way; qualified service personnel should inspect
for internal damage.
Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion
Teklogix-approved RAM® mounts and mounting hardware. Use of noncertified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended, and may
void warranty coverage.
Do not expose to rain or snow! However, the Powered Vehicle Cradle is
designed to accept a wet EP10 handheld without harmful effect.
This Powered Vehicle Cradle cannot be used with non- EP10
cradle accessories.
Figure 6.12 RV1005A Front View
Lat ches
St ylus Well
PLACE HOLDER
Docking
Connect or
Speaker
DC Power LED
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
243
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
6.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
Important: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted
vehicle cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury,
operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of
egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek
professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration,
especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose
cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix
for assistance.
In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking
joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the
optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.
The EP10 Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to be compatible with any RAM-B
mounting interface.
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the four #M4X12
threaded inserts on the rear of the unit (see Figure 6.13). Bolts are supplied with the cradle
and must not extend more than 7 mm into the vehicle cradle.
Figure 6.13 RV1005 Rear View
St ylus Tet her
Ring
#M4X10 Threaded Insert s
PLACE HOLDER
Mount ing Base
Cradl e
DC Power Port
244
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cable Arrangement
If you wish to custom mount the vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended
RAM-B, please take the following precautions:
•
•
•
•
When installing the cradle, ensure the driver’s view is not obstructed.
Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. air bags, seat belts, etc.
Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result otherwise.
Ensure the mounting has capacity to hold the cradle and EP10. Cradle plus EP10 weight
is approximately 1.3 kg.
• Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts—consult Customer Service
for instructions.
To accommodate the service loop of the connecting cable, leave a 10 cm clearance at the
bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17 cm clearance at the top of the vehicle cradle to
allow easy removal of the EP10. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the pedestal when selecting a mounting location.
6.12.1.1 Mounting Template
For detailed mounting instructions including a drill template, refer to the RV1005 EP10
Hand-Held Vehicle Cradle Quick Reference Guide (PN 8000165 TBD).
6.12.2 Cable Arrangement
Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices, review the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.
Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.
Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.
Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.
Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.
Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the
cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.
6.12.3 Electrical Requirements
The Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to allow the EP10 to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in the EP10 is also recharged by the vehicle battery system.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
245
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Electrical Requirements
Warning: Applying a voltage above 36VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the vehicle cradle power section and will void the product
warranty. For safety reasons, disconnect the vehicle cradle power cable
when the vehicle battery is being charged by an source other than the
vehicle alternator.
6.12.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle
The Powered Vehicle Cradle uses the vehicle power outlet or the vehicle fuse box to power
from the vehicle battery system. The Vehicle Outlet Power Adaptor (Model No. RV3050) is
used for the vehicle power outlet; the Power Extension cable (PN 1081146) is used for the
vehicle fuse box.
Figure 6. 14 Vehicle Out let Power Adapt or and Power Ext ension Cable
Warning: A properly trained technician must perform the power connection using
Power Extension cable (PN 1081146) and the RV1005. Improper connection
can damage the vehicle or the cradle.
This cable can be used to provide power to RV1005 from a fused circuit. The
vehicle cradle should be added to a fused circuit with a new maximum load
capacity of the original load plus the cradle load, which is 4A.
Power cables are equipped with fuses and instructions are supplied with each cable. Use
only a 4A slow blow Safety-approved fuse in the fuse assembly.
These cables should only supply operating power from the vehicle to the Powered Vehicle
Cradle from 12VDC or 24VDC systems.
246
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
USB and Serial Connections
•
•
The Powered Vehicle Cradle draws no more than 1.9 A @ 12 VDC or 0.95 A @
24 VDC. Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at
least 4A. The Powered Vehicle Cradle and peripherals can be used with both negative
ground systems when using the Power Extension cable. Peripheral wiring should be
closely examined to avoid ground loops in positive ground systems.
There is the option of connecting power to the cradle before or after the ‘key’ switch.
- It is preferable to wire after the key switch. In this configuration, when the key is
turned ON, the vehicle will power the cradle and docked EP10, charging the internal
battery when needed. When the vehicle ignition is OFF, the EP10 docked in the
cradle will run on its internal battery.
- However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a
shift, it may make more sense to wire the vehicle cradle before the switch. In this
case, the EP10 will always operate from vehicle power and that power will charge the
battery when needed.
- Keep in mind that the EP10 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as
long as the internal battery has sufficient charge.
6.12.4 USB and Serial Connections
Important: Depending on the configuration, the RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle has
up to three data connectors and one power connector.
The Powered Vehicle Cradle full configuration consists of two serial DE-9M ports and one
USB Type A port located at the base of the product. These are COM and USB ports that
allow the communication of serial and USB devices with the EP10. These ports are:
•
•
•
One powered USB A (Host).
One full Serial port.
One Serial port that provides power over pin 9. This port is located nearest the front
LED and is marked as COM 6 in Figure 6.15.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
247
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Using the Vehicle Cradle
Figure 6.15 RV1005 Port s
USB A (Host )
Port
PLACE HOLDER
Serial Port B
(COM 6)
Serial Port A
(COM 5)
DC Power Port
Peripherals such as scanners, printers, GPS, etc., may be used with the EP10 and the cradle.
Check with Psion Teklogix if there is any compatibility issue with the device you want to
use with the EP10 and the cradle.
6.12.5 Using the Vehicle Cradle
If your EP10 is equipped with a shoulder strap or protective cover, these accessories need to
be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove hand
straps or tethered devices from the unit.
•
•
Slide the EP10 into the cradle, and press firmly downward to the point where resistance
is met. Press the EP10 down through the resistance until it bottoms in the cradle – the
locks on the latches will engage. This can be one smooth motion if you wish. Electrical
contact will not be made until the EP10 is fully inserted. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to
pull up on the EP10 to be certain that it is secure.
To remove the unit, push the latches upwards – the EP10 will be released so that it can
be removed.
6.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle
•
•
•
•
248
Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the
unit clean.
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the
vehicle cradle.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents, or strong chemicals for cleaning.
The vehicle cradle has a plastic case and stamped logo that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic and stamping is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline.
They slowly decompose in strong alkaline solutions.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
EA11 Imager
•
•
6.13
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.
The two-lock assembly in the Powered Vehicle Cradle holds the EP10 firmly in place.
Although this mechanism is designed for at least 20,000 cycles, it will wear over time
and will no longer lock the EP10 securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and
instructions contact Psion Teklogix. Partial disassembly is required.
EA11 Imager
The EP10 hand-held supports the EA11 Decoded 2D imager. This imager can be configured
using the Scanner Settings located under Settings>System>Teklogix Scanners (see “Scanner
Settings” on page 150) and the Manage Triggers application (see “Manage Triggers” on
page 133).
It is critical that you review the safety information in the “EP10 Hand-Held Regulatory &
Warranty Guide”, PN 8000235 before proceeding.
6.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers
An imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at one time). It can
find a bar code regardless of its orientation – that is, even a bar code printed at a 45 degree
angle to the EP10 will be decoded successfully.
Note: When scanning multiple bar codes, ensure that all of the desired bar codes are
within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all bar codes are
within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded
bar codes are passed to the application program. The application program then
issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing bar codes.
When scanning a single bar code, ensure that only the desired bar code is within the
field of view of the scanner.
Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise
may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode
the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from the EP10.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
249
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Bluetooth Peripherals
Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic
coated bar codes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing
at a shiny surface, either shift the bar code to the side or top, or angle the
bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.
Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the bar code in order to decode it.
It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady
between flashes to improve decode performance.
•
•
Switch the EP10 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained.
• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker)
is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the bar code
you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to
be scanned.
The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the bar code(s)
is taken.
6.14
Bluetooth Peripherals
The EP10 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, making it possible to communicate with a
variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers and
so on.
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
• GSM/GPRS universal handset
• Bluetooth printer
• Bluetooth headset
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band.
Although the EP10 includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system
will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios
operate in the EP10 at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g
network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction
rates (such as printers and scanners).
250
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Digital Camera
Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 172 for information about setting up your Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your
Bluetooth device to determine the method used to pair with the EP10 host.
6.15
Digital Camera
The EP10 can be equipped with an optional digital camera that can take still pictures or short
video clips. Refer to “Pictures & Videos” on page 75 for details about using the camera.
The Pictures & Videos applet allows the operator to activate the camera for still shots or
video clips. It also provides a number of tools to crop photos, adjust picture contrast and
brightness, zoom in and out of photos, and save your adjustments.
Important: The “Pictures & Videos” program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats.
Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they
can be transferred to the EP10 hand-held.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
251
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Expansion Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6 Bar Code Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7 Digital Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.8 Voice Over IP (VOIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.10 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.11 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio
7.2.2 Murata Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Sierra Wireless MC5728V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.255
.255
.256
.256
.257
.257
.257
.257
.257
.257
.258
.258
.259
.259
.260
.261
.263
.265
7.4 Internal Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
7.4.1 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
7.4.1.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
253
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515
7.1
EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515
Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.
7.1.1
Hardware
Physical Dimensions
•
Device: 6.2" x 3.1" x 1.2" (158 mm x 78 mm x 30.6 mm)
Weight (with battery pack)
•
Weight with battery: 0.8 lb (336 g)
User Interface
•
Display (Backlit)
- 3.7 in. VGA portrait mode
- Backlight feature 165 cd/m2 output
- Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen
- Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT
- Passive stylus or finger operation
•
Audio
- Built-in 85db mono speaker
- microphone
- receiver
•
Keyboard (Backlit)
- QWERTY
- High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight
- Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one-hand operation
•
Camera
- 3.2 Mega Pixel Colour
- Auto Focus
- Dual LED Flash
- Video capture capability
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
255
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Software
7.1.2
Software
Platform
•
•
•
•
AM3715 Processor
800 MHz (ARM Cortex A8)
On-board RAM: 256 MB SDRAM
On-board ROM: 2 GB Flash
Operating System
•
Microsoft Windows Embedded 6.5
Programming Environment
•
•
•
•
•
HTML, XML
Mobile Devices SDK
JavaTM
Visual Studio® 2008
Standard protocol APIs - Windows® sockets
Application Software
•
•
•
•
7.1.3
Internet Explorer® Mobile included with Windows® Mobile® 6
Wordpad
ActiveSync
Mobile Control Center (MCC) device management
Wireless Communication
Note: 802.11ab/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.
•
•
On-board IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
Bluetooth v2.1 radio (CCX V4 Certified
- UMTS 3.5G HSPA radio options (TBD)
- Integrated 5 band Antenna, supports both voice and data
- SiRF starIV GPS
256
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Power Management
7.1.4
Power Management
•
•
•
•
7.1.5
Expansion Slot
•
7.1.6
Optional High Cap 3600 mAh Li-ion rechargeable battery
Full Shift operation
SMART battery
System backup (5 minutes) during battery swap
One microSD slot
Bar Code Application
Note: User upgradeable.
•
7.1.7
Digital Camera
•
•
•
•
7.1.8
3.2 mega pixel colour
Auto Focus
Dual LED Flash
Video capture capability
Voice Over IP (VOIP)
•
7.1.9
2D EA11 imager
Push-to-talk
Accessories
For details about accessories available with the EP10, refer to Chapter 6: “Peripheral
Devices & Accessories”.
•
Carrying Accessories:
- Hand strap
- Carrying case
•
Communications:
- Quad dock (4-site) with 10/100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
257
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Approvals
- Desktop dock with Type A and Type B USB connectivity and charge functions for an
internal battery along with a spare battery.
•
Power supplies:
- AC wall adaptor
- Vehicle power outlet adaptor
- Quad charger (4-site)
- Snap Module: USB DE9M powered serial plus Charger
- Snap Module: USB Host/Client plus Power/Charger
•
Vehicle peripherals:
- Powered and Non-powered cradle
- RAM Mount with screws
7.1.10 Approvals
•
•
•
•
•
FCC Parts 15B, 15C, 15E, 22H, 24E, 27
IC RSS-210, RSS-132, RSS-133
EN 300 328, EN 301 489, EN 55022, EN55024, EN301 511, EN301 908, EN300 440,
EN301 893
Safety IEC/EN 60950-1
Laser Safety IEC 60825-1
7.1.11 Environmental Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
258
Operating Temperature: 14ºF to 122 ºFC (-10ºC to +50ºC)
Storage Temperature: -4ºF to 140ºF (-20ºC to +65ºC)
Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
Rain & Dust Protection: IP54, IEC 529
Drop: 5 ft (1.5 m) - 26 drops to polished concrete
Tumble: 250 times at 0.5 m
ESD: +/- 15k Vdc air discharge, +/- 8k Vdc contacts
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Radio Specifications
7.2
Radio Specifications
7.2.1
Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio
Paramet er
Sub-paramet ers
Form Factor
Antenna Port
Antenna Type
Antenna Gain
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Specif icat ions
Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi
802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio
802.11b/g/n
U.FL jack. Non-diversity.
Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) and
Bluetooth radio
802.11a/n
U.FL jack. Non-diversity.
802.11b/g/n
PIFA antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz
@ <2.0:1 VSWR
802.11a/n
PIFA antenna. Covers 5150-5860 MHz
@ <2.0:1 VSWR
802.11b/g/n
3.73 dBi
802.11a/n
4.85 dBi
802.11b
+13 to +14 dBm typical
802.11g
+13 dBm typical
802.11a
+12 dBm typical
802.11n (2.4 GHz)
+12 dBm typical
802.11n (5 GHz)
+12 dBm typical
802.11b/g/n
2400-2484 MHz
802.11a/n
5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 57255845 MHz
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
259
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Murata Bluetooth Radio
Paramet er
RX Sensitivity
Data Rates
EVM
Sub-paramet ers
802.11b
-78 dBm @ 11 Mbps
802.11g
-67 dBm @ 54 Mbps
802.11a
-67 dBm @ 54 Mbps
802.11n (2.4 GHz)
-66 dBm @ 65 Mbps
802.11n (5 GHz
-66 dBm @ 65 Mbps
802.11b
1,2,5.5,11 Mbps
802.11a/g
6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps
802.11n
6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 Mbps
802.11b
32% max
802.11g
-26 dB max
802.11a
-26 dB max
802.11n (2.4 GHz)
-29 dB max
802.11n (5 GHz
-29 dB max
Bluetooth Coexistence
7.2.2
Specif icat ions
TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.
Murata Bluetooth Radio
Paramet er
260
Specif icat ions
Form Factor
Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and
Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio
Antenna Port
U.FL jack (shared with Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n radio)
Antenna Type
PIFA antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz
@ <2.0:1 VSWR
Antenna Gain
3.73 dBi
Transmit Power
6.5 dBm typical
Frequency Range
2.400-2.4835 GHz
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Sierra Wireless MC5728V
Paramet er
7.2.3
Specificat ions
Channel
79
RX Sensitivity
-90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max
Data Rates
-90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max
802.11 Coexistence
TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.
Sierra Wireless MC5728V
Feat ures
Specif icat ions
Physical
• Small PCI-Express Mini Card standards-based form factor. Adheres
to Rev 1.2 of the PCI Express Mini Card Specification
• Two U.FL RF connector jacks
Electrical
The MC5728V Mini Card is self-shielded; no additional shielding is
required.
Environmental
Temperature operating range:
• IS-98D compliance: -30 to +60° C
• Reduced RF performance: +60 to +75° C
RF
Application Interface
• Dual-band support for both the 800 MHz cellular and 1.9 GHz PCS
bands
• Receive diversity support for the 800 MHz cellular and 1.9 GHz PCS
bands
• Adheres to CDMA authentication as specified in CDMA 1X
• Support for IS-95A/B and CDMA 1X Release 0/A
• Support for IS-856 1xEV-DO Revision A
Support for gpsOne™ and stand-alone GPS
• USB supporting multiple logical channels over the USB MUX
protocol
• USB selective suspend supported for maximum power savings
• Wakeup Enable-the modem can be set to wake the host device upon
ring, restoration of radio coverage, and/or receipt of SMS
• AT command interface
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
261
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Sierra Wireless MC5728V
Feat ures
Voice
Specif icat ions
The MC5728V Mini Card has internal IS-127 and IS-733 vocoders and
supports:
•
•
•
•
•
Packet Mode
IS-95 circuit-switched
Short Message Service
(SMS)
262
Call origination
Silent retry call origination protocol
Echo cancellation
E911
Incoming call notification
• IS-2000 data rates up to 1531 kbps, simultaneous forward and reverse
channel
• IS-856 (1xEV-DO Rev. A) data rates up to 3.1 Mbps forward channel
and 1.8 Mbps reverse channel
• V.34 data rates to 14.4 kbps
• Quick Net Connect (QNC) support
• Send and receive
• Notification of new messages
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio
7.2.4
Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio
Feat ure
Specificat ions
General
Frequency bands
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900MHz
UMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/AWS/1900/2100MHz
GSM class
Small MS
Output power (according to
Release 99)
Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM850
Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM900
Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1800
Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1900
Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK
Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd I
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd II
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS AWS, WCDMA FDD Bd IV
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd V
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VI
Operating Temperature
(board temperature)
Normal operation: -30°C to +85°C
Restricted operation: -40°C to +95°C
Physical
Dimensions: 33.9mm x 50mm x 3.1mm
Weight: approx. 9.5g
RoHS
All hardware components fully compliant with EU RoHS Directive
HSPA f eat ures
3GPP Release 6, 7
DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps
UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported
Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212
UMTS feat ures
3GPP Release 4
PS data rate - 384 kbps DL / 384 kbps UL
CS data rate - 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps UL
GSM/ GPRS/ EGPRS f eat ures
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
263
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio
Feat ure
Specif icat ions
Data transfer
GPRS:
• Multislot Class 12
• Full PBCCH support
• Mobile Station Class B
• Coding Scheme 1 - 4
EGPRS:
• Multislot Class 12
• EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK
• Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
• Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
• SRB loopback and test mode B
• 8-bit, 11-bit RACH
• PBCCH support
• 1 phase/2 phase access procedures
• Link adaptation and IR
• NACC, extended UL TBF
• Mobile Station Class B
CSD:
• V.110, RLP, non-transparent
• 14.4kbps
• USSD
SMS
Point-to-point MT and MO
Cell broadcast
GPS feat ures
Protocol
NMEA
Modes
Standalone GPS, Assisted GPS (control plane AGPS, E911 / user
plane AGPS, gpsOneXTRA™)
General
Power saving modes
GPS tracking in parallel to 2G/3G diversity operation
Soft ware
264
AT commands
Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion
Wireless Modules commands
SIM application toolkit
SAT Release 99
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications
Feat ure
Specificat ions
Audio
Audio speech codecs
GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR
3GPP: AMR
Speakerphone operation, echo cancellation, noise suppression
Firmware update
Generic update from host application over ASC0 or USB
Int erfaces
Module interface
80-pin board-to-board connector
Antenna
50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna,
GPS antenna (active/passive)
USB
USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interface
Serial interface
ASC0:
• 8-wire modem interface with status and control lines, unbalanced,
asynchronous
• Adjustable baud rates from 9,600bps up to 921,600bps
• Supports RTS0/CTS0 hardware flow control
• Multiplex ability according to GSM 07.10 Multiplexer Protocol
UICC interface
Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8V
Special f eat ures
7.3
Phonebook
SIM and phone
Antenna
SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP (Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance)
RX diversity type 3i
Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications
Descript ion
Specificat ion
Model Number
RV3010
Part Number
TBD (North America)
TBD (World)
Chemistry
Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
265
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications
Descript ion
Battery Voltage
Specif icat ion
2.7 V ~ 4.2 V (minimum ~ maximum)
3.7 V (nominal)
Capacity
3600 mAh/13.32Whr (typical)
3450 mAh/12.76 Whr (minimum)
Charge Current
1.72 A (typical)
Charge Voltage
4.2V +/- 0.05
Charge Method
constant-current/constant-voltage (CC/CV)
Discharge Current
1.72 A (typical)
2.8 A (maximum)
Internal Resistance
125 m
(typical)
Storage Temperature
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
Charge temperature
0°C to +45°C (32°F to +113°F) (typical)
Discharge Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F) (typical)
266
Charge Taper Current
48 ~ 120 mA
Charge Time
3 hrs. (typical)
Pre-condition Charge
Current
3 00 ~ 360 mA
Pre-condition Charge
Termination Voltage
3V
Cycle Life
300 charge/discharge cycles with no degradation below 80% of nominal
capacity based on 0.5 C charge / 0.5 C discharge rates (to 3.0 V) @ 23° C.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: Specifications
Internal Imager
7.4
Internal Imager
This section lists specifications for the EA11 Decoded 2D imager.
7.4.1
EA11 Decoded 2D Imager
Paramet er
Specificat ion
Scan Rate
2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptive
Linear Emulation Mode
200 scans/s auto adaptive
Scan Angle
38.9° (horizontal), 25.4° (vertical)
Optical Resolution
752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels
Print Contrast
down to 25%
Versions
Standard range and high density
Symbologies - 1D
EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS,
Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/
Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI,
Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post,
Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)
Symbologies - 2D
Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR,
Aztec GS1 composite codes
Voltage (optics)
3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values)
Operating Current
170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent)
Power Saving Mode
2mA
Ambient Light
Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
Regulatory Approvals
UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
267
Preliminary Draft
7.4.1.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances
Preliminary Draft
APPENDIX
WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WWAN)
A.1
Wireless WAN
Psion Teklogix offers the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio – an EP10 hand-held
equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With
this radio and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the EP10
voice option to place phone calls.
A.1.1
Taskbar Icons
Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network
connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS radio is installed in the computer, and the interface is enabled.
Once the modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to
the signal strength icon indicating the kind of packet data service. Keep in mind
that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is
not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G - GSM/GPRS
E - GSM/EDGE
U - UMTS
H - UMTS/HSDPA
X - CDMA/1xRTT
i - iDEN
W - WiDEN
User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).
A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.
The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network (the
signal strength is 0%).
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 1% and 20%.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-1
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Establishing a Connection
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 21% and 40%.
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 41% and 60%.
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 61% and 80%.
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 81% and 100%.
A GPRS packet data connection is active, the signal strength is between 41% and 60% and
GSM/GPRS packet service is available.
The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data connection is started.
A GPRS packet data connection is active.
In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown.
A new SMS (Short Message Service) message has arrived.
The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (SIM card and GPRS radio
are installed). When you have an active call, this icon flashes yellow and then green.
A.1.2
Establishing a Connection
To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box:
• Double-tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar.
If the icon is not visible in the taskbar, the radio interface has been shut down or the modem
has been removed:
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Wireless WAN icon.
The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed.
A-2
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Establishing a Connection
Figure A.1 Est ablishing a Connect ion
Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to“Entering a PIN Number” on page A-4
for details.
When “Ready to connect” is displayed in the Status field, the Connect Data button
is enabled.
• Tap on the Connect Data button.
The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.
•
•
•
•
PPP link to modem active.
Authenticating user.
User authenticated.
Connected.
Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the
connection is rapid.
When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the taskbar icon changes to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect.
A.1.2.1 Disconnecting From a Network
To disconnect from the network:
•
Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-3
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Advanced Information
When the computer’s network connection is severed, the Status field displays “Ready
to connect”.
The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection
is active. The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and
received, respectively.
A.1.2.2 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface
While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this
by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main
Wireless WAN dialog box.
Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by opening
the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless
WAN dialog box.
A.1.3
Advanced Information
In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer, setup is
automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing a Connection” on
page A-2 to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced
setup purposes.
A.1.3.1 Entering a PIN Number
If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.
•
Type your PIN, and press [ENTER].
Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to
the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.
Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to
perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN
dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A-4
Searching for modem.
Initializing modem.
SIM is ready.
Searching for network.
Registered on network.
Searching for GPRS.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Advanced Information
• Ready to connect.
If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated:
Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data, and Ready
to connect.
A.1.3.2 Error States
The following temporary error states (i.e., these states may disappear without interaction)
may be displayed:
•
Emergency calls only.
The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agreement between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.
•
No network found.
A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.
•
Packet data not available.
The current network does not support a packet data service.
•
Packet data not allowed.
The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network (e.g. no
GPRS roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be
in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all.
The remaining error states are permanent:
•
SIM is missing.
The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required.
•
SIM failure.
The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered
too many times). A new SIM is needed.
•
Modem failure.
The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a warm boot does not clear
this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.
•
NDIS error.
An internal software error has occurred. If a warm boot does not clear this condition,
Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-5
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
A.1.4
Tools Menu
The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced
setup features.
A.1.4.1 Data Configuration
Enable Automatic Connect
If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless
WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction).
A-6
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
To activate the automatic connection mode:
• Tap on the OK button.
While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless
LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto. To close the currently active connection (if any)
and disable the automatic connection mode:
•
Tap on Disable Auto.
Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than
the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected
to open and close connections.
If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes
the GPRS connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to reestablish the connection.
Use Virtual Serial Port
If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the
virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly.
This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network)
clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled
(unchecked).
Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.
Enable Automatic Configuration
In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the
same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is
detected (this may require a warm boot). The connection parameters are retrieved from
a database.
Manual configuration should be necessary only if:
•
•
•
One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the
database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)
An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords.
A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be
configured manually.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-7
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
•
A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be
configured manually.
Profiles
In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such
as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a ‘profile’.
Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special
in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. The Default profile uses parameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is
used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile
can be active at any time.
If connection profiles are configured manually, the Enable automatic configuration checkbox should normally be unchecked.
In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic
configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being
from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured
profile for each SIM card. For this to work, each profile must be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM
is ready).
The Select profile: drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a
subsequent action applies. A profile named Default is always present and contains the
current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:
Show
The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button.
For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown – otherwise, the password
is hidden.
Edit
The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep
in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.
Delete
The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.
Activate
When this button is chosen, the selected profile becomes the active profile. Activation is
possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked.
A-8
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
New
Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile.
Figure A.2 Creat ing a New Prof ile
The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the
name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a
unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a
secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN
has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box
and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will
be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button
in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected). If Force PAP authentication (Password
Authentication Protocol) is enabled, a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate
a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider.
Reset
The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to
the values they had when the dialog box was opened.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-9
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
Advanced IP
Figure A.3 Assigning IP Inf ormat ion
The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another
dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS
fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers.
A.1.4.2 Security Configuration
The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu. The Security
Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need
the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be
changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)
Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled.
A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.
The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. While this option remains unchecked, any PIN entered on
startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the
modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then
A-10
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume
after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the
Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up.
If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox
should be checked. In this case, the PIN is not stored; whenever a PIN is required, you will
be prompted to enter an appropriate value.
A.1.4.3 Network Configuration
In the main Wireless WAN window:
•
Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.
By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed
networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the
home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which
you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming
if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign
roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have
GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which
you know to support GPRS roaming.
Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is
disabled, you must select a network manually.
Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operation – a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For
every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identifier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code)
is displayed.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-11
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have
roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it
does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers
GPRS.
A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a
network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN
dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not
available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.
A.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration
By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked).
The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS (e.g.
dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development, testing, approvals, etc.). If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is
shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen.
If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver checkbox is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is
closed using the OK button.
Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can
be displayed.
Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected, the Enable automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a
serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used
with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through
A-12
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no
parity and hardware flow control.
A.1.4.5 Modem Information
The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited, they only display information about the computer’s modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into his
SIM, the Phone: field remains empty. If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial
modem information may be available.
A.1.4.6 User Interface
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-13
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Tools Menu
Taskbar
Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN
icons will be displayed in the taskbar.
Sounds
Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which
sounds your EP10 will emit and when these sounds will be played.
A-14
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
SMS Menu
A.1.5
SMS Menu
SMS (Short Message Service) functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems
that support a SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.
A.1.5.1 New
Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's
phone number (to be entered in the To: field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as
the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international
number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character).
By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox
before being sent. If no storage space is available, or the modem does not support the storage
of outgoing messages, then this checkbox is disabled.
A.1.5.2 Inbox
Tapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for
example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted
with the most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by
clicking on the corresponding column heading. Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message
whose address begins with that letter or number.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-15
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Voice
Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu
in Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be
closed and re-opened.
The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message
can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox
message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above,
except the destination phone number is filled in already.
A.1.5.3 Outbox
Tapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox
behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent
is not available for GSM modems.
A.1.5.4 SMS Configuration
Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS
Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message
dialog. The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message
sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the
message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period
regardless of the setting).
Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period
is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog
is opened the rounded value is shown.
The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming
message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a
new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is deleted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, then messages beginning
with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user, as
long as those messages begin with the string configured here.
A.1.6
Voice
The Voice tab is described in detail under “Voice – Using the Phone Dialer” on page 31.
A-16
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Power Mode
A.2
Power Mode
The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel
(not through the Wireless WAN user interface).
For CF Card modems, the settings are found under the Devices tab. If the checkbox for a
modem is unchecked, no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded (neither the
serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked, power is
applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on. Power is
removed from the modem when the computer enters suspend mode.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
A-17
Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
APPENDIX
PORT PINOUTS
B.1
Dock Port Pinout
Pin #
Pin Name
Signal
Direct ion Relat ive To DPA
DGND
VDD_EXT_PWR
Input
VDD_BATT_OUT
Output
Comment
GND
VDD_EXT_PWR
VDD_EXT_PWR
VDD_EXT_PWR
BATT_OUT
AUDIO_P
Output
Audio positive.
AUDIO_N
Output
Audio negative.
VDD_USBOTG
Bi-directional
USB Power
(+5.5V).
As output, supplies external
devices when
EP10 is in USB
Host mode.
As input,
charges battery
when EP10 is in
USB Client
mode.
DOCK_ID
Input
Dock ID.
10
USB_OTG_DN
Bi-directional
11
USB_OTG_DP
Bi-directional
These 3 pins are
connected
together.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
B-1
Preliminary Draft
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
Battery Contact Pinout
Pin #
B.2
Pin Name
Direct ion Relat ive To DPA
Comment
12
USB_OTG_ID
13
GND
14
TXDATA
Output
RS-232 data
transmit.
Max bit rate
115 kbits/sec.
15
RXDATA
Input
RS-232 data
receive.
Max bit rate
115 kbits/sec.
16
GND
Input
DGND
DGND
Battery Contact Pinout
PIN #
B-2
Signal
Signal Name
Funct ion
Pack +
Battery positive
Pack +
Battery positive
DQ
Serial data I/O
Det
Connect to Pack – through 0
No Connection
Pack -
Battery negative
Pack -
Battery negative
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
APPENDIX
BAR CODES SETTINGS
C.1
Scanner Menu
The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from
the imager for your unit.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes
it supports.
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those
codes that are required by the application.
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal
imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the
Barcode dialog boxes.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-1
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanner
C.2
Decoded (Internal) Scanner
C.2.1
Options – Decoded (Internal) Scanner
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you doubletap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec,
200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which
you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming dot.
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the
scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value
between 5 and 99, each number representing 0.1.
C-2
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
C.2.2
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the
scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
Power Mode
This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power
mode options: Continuous Power and Low Power.
In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or a serial
communication.
In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger
pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable
for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to
scan a bar code.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
the EP10 is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not
used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-3
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)
Linear Security Level
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality.
There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of
5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 4.
“Linear security level 1” specifies that the following code types must be successfully read
twice before being decoded:
Code Type
Lengt h
Codabar
All
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 5 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
“Linear security level 2” specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice
before being decoded.
“Linear security level 3” specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type
Lengt h
MSI Plessey
4 or less
D 2 of 5
8 or less
I 2 of 5
8 or less
“Linear security level 4” requires that all code types be successfully read three times before
being decoded.
Bi-Direction Redundancy
Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.
C-4
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions
(forward and reverse) before being decoded.
Scan Angle
This option allows you to choose from two scan angles: Normal Angle or Alternate Angle.
Choosing Normal Angle allows the normal operation for scanning long range and short
range. Choosing Alternate Angle widens the beam to allow scanning of long bar codes at
short range but at the cost of long range scanning.
C.2.3
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Scanning Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose
one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster, Programmable Raster,
Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern or Semi-Omni Pattern.
Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate
These parameter determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.
Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or
Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster
Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended
for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning
purposes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1 to 15.
C.2.4
Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character
prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded
symbol.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
transmit code: None, AIM or Symbol.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-5
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39
Scan Data Format
This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on
“Scan Data Format” displays the following options from which you can choose a data
format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2]
and [P] data [S1][S2].
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.
When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter
a value from 0 to 255.
Delete Char Set ECIs
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing
Character Set ECIs – Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as GLIs) from its buffer
before transmission.
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417
bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.
ECI Decoder
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were
not encoded using ECIs.
If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned,
the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.
C.2.5
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The
scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows
this type of symbology to be recognized.
C-6
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39
Convert To Code 32
Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code 39”
to “Code 32”.
Code 32 Prefix
Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32”
bar codes.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 1 to 55.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-7
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when
this parameter is enabled.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must to enabled.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the “Decode Performance Level” parameter.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
The parameters in this sub-menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be
decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size parameters (see below). The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if
the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows:
•
•
•
C-8
Strip the leading and trailing characters.
Add the prefix and suffix characters.
Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if
the length falls between the minimum and maximum size.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 128
Field Size
When a value is assigned for this parameter, only bar codes that match the field size exactly
can be transmitted. If a value is assigned to this parameter, a Minimum Size and Maximum
Size value is not required.
Minimum Size And Maximum Size
When a value is assigned to these parameters, only bar code lengths that fall between the
minimum and maximum value can be decoded. If values are assigned to these parameters, a
Field Size value is not required.
Add/Remove Data
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key
you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key
value of the keypress is displayed.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you
want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of
the keypress is displayed.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
C.2.6
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.
Enable GS1-128/GS1 US
Previously UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators and start
codes.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-9
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
EAN 13
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this variation, “Enable ISBT 128” must be set to on.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is set to on, one of three decode levels assigned to the “Decode Performance Level” parameter can be selected.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind
that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.7
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.8
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
EAN-8 Zero Extend
When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols,
making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns
EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.
C-10
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
UPC A
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.9
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.
UPC-A Check Digit
If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
UPC-A Preamble
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one
of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country code and System Char –
both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the or None
– no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.10
UPC E
Enabled UPC-E
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
UPC-E And UPC-E1 Check Digit
If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar
code data.
UPC-E And UPC-E1 Preamble
When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can
choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmitted to the host device: System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country
code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-11
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
transmitted with the data or None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are
considered part of the symbol.
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.11
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN
bar codes.
Enable Bookland EAN
Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize “Bookland EAN”
bar codes.
Supplementals
“Supplementals” are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).
Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is
decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN
symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the
“Supp. Redundancy” parameter.
Supp. Redundancy
With Autodiscriminate selected in the “Supplementals” parameter, “Supp. Redundancy”
adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a
value between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is
selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.
C-12
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 93
Security Level
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level
from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the
time it takes to decode the bar code.
Linear Decode
“Linear Decode” applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN8, EAN-13). When enabled (set to on), a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and
right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled
when bar codes are in proximity to each other.
2D UPC Half Block Stitching
Setting this parameter to on enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for the SE 3223 omnidirectional engine only.
C.2.12
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93” or off to disable it.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 4 to 55.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-13
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Codabar
C.2.13
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar” or off to disable it.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human
readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing
two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 5 to 55.
CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters
and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar
symbol.
Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar
symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.14
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI Plessey”.
C-14
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
MSI Plessey
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 6 to 55.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or
Two check digit(s).
If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check
Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm: must also be
selected. See below for details.
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar
code data.
Check Digit Algorithm
When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification is required to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box n which
you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or MOD 10/MOD 10.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-15
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
C.2.15
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 4 to 14.
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to
ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.16
Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
C-16
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
RSS Code
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,
human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified
range from 1 to 12.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.17
RSS Code
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “2D RSS Code” scanning capability.
Enable RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology)
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the
other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height
of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.
Enable RSS Limited
“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item
number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read
omni-directionally.
Enable RSS Expanded
“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but it can be
split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while
increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-directionally scanned.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-17
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Composite
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.2.18
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of
symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.
In addition, “Center Bar Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite
symbol.
Enable CC-C And Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Enable TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
C.2.19
PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C-18
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Micro PDF-417
C.2.20
Micro PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is
a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but
lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-19
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Decoded
C.3
Decoded
•
C.3.1
Tap on the Scanner drop down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).
Options – Decoded Scanner
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the
scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value
between 1 and 10 seconds.
C.3.2
Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the
scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly
triggers on/off.
C-20
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a
successful decode restores normal blinking.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
the EP10 is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not
used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes.
Same Read Validate
The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The
value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from
0 to 10 times.
Same Read Timeout
Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned determines
after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Diff Read Timeout
Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Add AIM ID Prefix
The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar
code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of
the decoded bar code.
C.3.3
Code 39
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-21
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Start/Stop Transmit
Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are
usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $ character (see also
next parameter, “Accepted Start Char”).
Accepted Start Char
This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or
both ($ char, * char, $ and * char).
Check Digit Verification
Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the
symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not
transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP, or Italian CIP.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a
standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
C-22
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 128
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.4
Code 128
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.
GS1-128
“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former
correct name was UCC/EAN-128.
GS1-128 Identifier
“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID " ]C1" for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed.
By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to
read normal EAN 128 Codes.
FNC1 Conversion
“FNC1 Conversion” allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to another character for applications that cannot use the default  Group Separator or hex (1d).
Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range – 0 to 255.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this
option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deactivated to avoid any confusion.
ISBT Concat Transmit
The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided
for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits
only concatenated codes – single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing Concatenated or
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-23
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
EAN 13
Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that
code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be
concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair (see below) is enabled.
ISBT Concat Any Pair
Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do
not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Specification for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The
default setting Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter uses the
specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data
before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
ISBN Conversion
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
C-24
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
EAN 8
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.7
UPCA
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-25
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
UPC E
C.3.8
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Enable UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar
code data.
Convert To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections (e.g. Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.9
UPC/EAN Shared
The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is shared
across all UPC and EAN bar codes.
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter
provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted.
• Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.
When “Addendum” is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner searches for
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an
addendum.
C-26
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 93
Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5
Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or
5 characters.
Addendum Security
If you tap on “Addendum Security”, a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the
security level of add-on 2 or add-on 5 with a value from 0 to 100. As security levels increase, the scanner decode speed decreases.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to
read normal EAN 128 Codes.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
C.3.10
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including
check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-27
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Codabar
C.3.11
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Transmit
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:
a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of
those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting
this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
CLSI Library System
When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in
the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a
specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical
Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
C-28
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
MSI Plessey
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.12
MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI”.
Enable Plessy
Set this parameter to on to enable “Plessy”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.
This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the
data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Plessy Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Plessy Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code
refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-29
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 11
C.3.13
Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10
Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the
integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm,
the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.14
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French CIP.
“Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to
ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that
algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
C-30
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Matrix 2 of 5
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7
characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code
refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including
check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.15
Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including
check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-31
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Discrete 2 of 5
C.3.16
Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Standard 2 of 5 Format
This parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identic on (6 start/stop bars)
or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. “Check Digit
Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity
of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is
not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code
length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.17
Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.
C-32
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Format
This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII
or Numeric.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.18
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.
Enable RSS-14
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the
other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height
of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.
Enable RSS Limited
“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item
number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read
omni-directionally.
Enable RSS Expanded
“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but they can
be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while
increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-directionally scanned.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-33
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Composite
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.19
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled.
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a
composite symbol.
Enable CC-C And Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.
Linear Transmission Only
When ‘Linear Transmission Only’ is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite
bar code is transmitted when scanned.
UPC-EAN Composite Message
This option allows you to choose how UPC-EAN shared bar codes are transmitted: Always
Linked, Never Linked or Auto-discriminate.
C.3.20
TLC-39
Enable
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol.
Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.
Linear Transmission Only
When “Linear Transmission Only” is enabled, only the linear portion of the composite bar
code is transmitted when scanned.
C-34
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
PDF-417
Security Level
This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC-39 and standard Code 39. Tapping on
“Security Level” displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100. The
higher the value assigned, the lower the decode rate.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.21
PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.22
Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted
with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of
the following prefixes:
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-35
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Codablock
]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.3.23
Codablock
Enable Codablock A
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type A”.
Enable Codablock F
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type F”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C-36
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Imager
C.4
Imager
•
C.4.1
Tap on the Scanner drop down menu, and choose Imager.
Options – Imager
Center Barcode Only
Note: This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes.
When more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot, this parameter allows you to
specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read. When
this parameter is set to on, the target dot is pointed at the centre image and only that image
is returned.
Max Number Barcodes
This parameter specifies the maximum number of bar codes the imager will attempt to
decode in an image. A maximum of 6 bar codes can be decoded at one time.
Barcodes Must Decode
This parameter specifies the minimum number of bar codes that the imager must decode in
order to report success.
Note: This number must be less than the number of bar codes assigned to “Max Number
Barcodes”. The driver validates and reassigns the value if necessary.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-37
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Code 39 Settings
C.4.2
Code 39 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 39”.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to
ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.3
Code 128 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.4
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.
C-38
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
EAN 8
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter
provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required. Depending on the value chosen for
this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.
• Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.
When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this
parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists,
appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not
accept the main bar code without an addendum.
Note: Setting “Addendum” to ‘Optional’ reduces performance. It should only be chosen if
at least some of the bar codes being read have addendums.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.5
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-26.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.6
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-26.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-39
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
UPC E
C.4.7
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-26.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.8
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.9
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.10
Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
C-40
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies
with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is transmitted along with the I 2 of 5 symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.11
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.12
Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of
symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.
C.4.13
PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-41
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Micro PDF-417
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.14
Micro PDF-417
Enable
Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is
a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but
lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.15
2D Data Matrix
Enable
Set this parameter to on to enable “Data Matrix”.
Inverse Video Mode
Enabling this parameter allows the imager to read inverse bar codes – white symbols presented on a black background.
Rectangular
Enabling this parameter allows the imager to recognize rectangular (as opposed to square)
symbols.
Small Physical Size
Set to on by default, this parameter is used to detect small sized or small featured 2D data
matrix symbologies. Turning this option off may decrease response time only if there is a
great deal of “clutter” (i.e., pictures) in the image. However because these images are normally clean (the labels contain only text and bar codes along with a significant amount of
white space), response time is usually not improved by turning this parameter off.
C-42
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
2D QR Code
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.16
2D QR Code
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.
Field Size
Refer to “Field Size” on page C-9 for details.
C.4.17
2D Maxicode
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to read “2D Maxicode” images.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.18
2D Aztec
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to read “Aztec” symbologies.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-43
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Postal: PlaNET
C.4.19
Postal: PlaNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.20
Postal: PostNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.21
Postal: Australian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.22
Postal: Japanese
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.
C-44
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Postal: Korean
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.23
Postal: Korean
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.24
Postal: Royal
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C.4.25
Postal: Kix
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Kix”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
C-45
Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings
Postal: Canadian
C.4.26
Postal: Canadian
Enabled
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Canadian”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.
C-46
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
APPENDIX
TEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLET
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager
settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture
images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrates how the imager
works. Refer to “PTSI Imager Demo” on page 69 for details.
D.1
Required Applets
In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers and Teklogix Scanners applets
must be present in the Settings>System tab along with the Teklogix Imagers
applet.
D.2
Presets
There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix
Imagers applet:
•
•
Use a predefined preset.
Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.
Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used
whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent
group of settings that are known to work together in the intended
environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.
A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture.
Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or
resume from suspend.
The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom
preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only specified bar codes, read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual
media.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-1
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Predefined Presets
Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
• Imaging for photo capture.
• Imaging for bar code decoding.
• Symbology selection.
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected
active preset.
D.2.1
Predefined Presets
Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to
understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are
sufficient.
D.2.2
Bar Code Predefined Presets
These presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes. The
bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded.
The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images are
captured
D.2.2.1
Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets
The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Factory Default
This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes.
My Default
This preset is synchronized with the Teklogix Scanners applet and contains all the symbologies selected using the Teklogix Scanner applet. For details on this synchronization see,
“Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet” on page D-17.
All
This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode. For a description of these symbologies see “Imager” on page C-37.
D-2
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
Linear
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode. See
“Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.
Linear and PDF417
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can
decode. See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.
Matrix
This preset enables the decoding of all 2 D symbologies that the imager can decode. See
“Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.
Postal
This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.
See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.
D.2.3
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Low light
This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights
are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the
gain.
Low power
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the EP10.
Glossy surface
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to
read bar codes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-3
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Image Capture Predefined Presets
D.2.4
Image Capture Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Motion
This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.
Low light near
This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes
the flash.
D.3
Using The Teklogix Imagers Applet
D.3.1
Configuring The Image Capture Presets
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
D-4
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the Imaging
tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting A Camera
The following screen is displayed:
Figure D.4 Imaging Tab
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified
as follows:
•
•
•
D.3.2
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.
Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.
Selecting A Camera
If your EP10 has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configuration. To select a camera:
•
•
Tap on the Camera Presets dropdown menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – either Front Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or
Bottom Colour Camera, the camera located at back of the EP10.
Important: Currently, only the ‘Front Imager’ can be used to read bar codes. The
‘Bottom Colour Camera’ is limited to taking photos.
D.3.3
Setting The Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.4 on page D-5, the active preset is Low
light near. To set an active preset:
•
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-5
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Viewing A Preset
D.3.4
Viewing A Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
D.3.5
Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating A Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
•
D-6
Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying A Custom Preset
In this example, the Low light near preset was chosen. A screen like the sample below is
displayed.
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
D.3.6
Modifying A Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-7
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying A Custom Preset
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click
the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
D-8
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing A Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
D.3.7
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing A Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
D.4
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
Figure D.5 Bar Code Preset s
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as
follows:
•
•
•
Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Presets” on page D-2.
Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-9
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting A Camera
Note: The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
The top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
D.4.1
Selecting A Camera
If your EP10 has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configuration. To select a camera:
•
•
Tap on the Camera Presets dropdown menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera – either Front Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or
Bottom Colour Camera, the camera located at back of the EP10.
Important: Currently, only the ‘Front Imager’ can be used to read bar codes. The
‘Bottom Colour Camera’ is limited to taking photos.
D.4.2
Setting The Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.5 on page page D-9, the active preset is
Defaults. To set an active preset:
•
D.4.3
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing A Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
•
D-10
Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating A Custom Preset
The associated preset window is displayed.
•
D.4.4
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating A Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
•
•
Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-11
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying A Custom Preset
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
D.4.5
Modifying A Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
D-12
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing A Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
D.4.6
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing A Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
D.4.7
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Barcoding tab.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-13
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Setting The Active Preset
Figure D.6 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
D.4.8
Setting The Active Preset
An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.5 on page page D-9, the active preset is
Defaults. To set an active preset:
•
D.4.9
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing A Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
D-14
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating A Custom Preset
•
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
D.4.10 Creating A Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on OK to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked
as read and write.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-15
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying A Custom Preset
D.4.11 Modifying A Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
D-16
•
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.
•
•
•
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing A Custom Preset
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or
disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
•
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
D.4.12 Removing A Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
•
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
D.4.13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet
All changes made in the Symbologies Presets in the Imagers Applet are also made in the
Scanners Applet. The Scanner Applet will reflect the settings of whichever Symbologies
Preset is made active in the Imager Applet.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-17
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
Configuring Symbologies In The Teklogix Scanners Applet
When a symbology is enabled or configured using the Teklogix Scanners applet, the
changes are also made in the My Default preset. My Default automatically becomes the
active bar code symbology preset.
None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets is changed.
Configuring Symbologies In The My Default Preset
When My Default is the active preset
In this case, the changes to the symbology configuration are also made in the Teklogix Scanners applet.
When My Default is not the active preset
In this case, the changes to the symbology configuration are not made in the Teklogix Scanners applet.
D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
To configure rules for manipulating bar code data:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.
D.4.14.1 Modifying A Bar Code Setting
The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To
change the settings for a symbology:
•
D-18
Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
•
•
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the
parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and
the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
•
For a parameter that takes a single character:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the
parameter. The following screen is displayed:
•
When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-19
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.
Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in
either place affect both translation tables.
• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
• Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translation tab.
For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to the “Translations
Tab” on page 154.
D.4.16 Advanced Tab
D.4.16.1 File Locations For Captured Images
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
•
•
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.
Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.
To define the location where imager files will be stored:
D-20
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
•
Tap on the File Location button.
•
•
•
Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type.
Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.
When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.
D.4.16.2 Configuring Triggers
Viewing The Trigger Configuration
The trigger on the EP10 hand-held is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Teklogix Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet.
•
In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
D-21
Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Teklogix Scanners Applet
•
To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in
the checkbox next to Show all modules.
Adding, Editing And Removing Triggers
For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on
page 133.
D.5
Teklogix Scanners Applet
The bar code symbologies that are to be read by the imager can be enabled using the Teklogix Scanners applet. Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab followed by the Teklogix
Scanners icon displays this applet. Refer to “Imager” on page C-37 for a list of
symbologies.
Warning: Changes made to the symbology configuration using the Teklogix Scanner
applet are synchronized only with the My Defaults bar code symbology
preset. For details, refer to “Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix
Imagers Applet” on page D-17.
D-22
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
INDEX
Numbers
2DAztec D-43
2D Data Matrix D-42
2D imager scanner 249
2D Maxicode D-43
2D QR Code D-43
2D Raster Expand Rate D-5
2D UPC Half Block Stitching D-13
802.11a/b/g/n radio specifications 259
802.11ab/g/n radio 259
About, Bluetooth 180
About Device icon 120
About icon (software version) 119
AC adaptor
safety instructions 223
Accepted Start Char D-22
accessories
carrying case 222
desktop docking station 225
Ethernet cable 231
hand strap 219
quad docking station 230
RV1005 powered vehicle cradle 242
vehicle cradle 238
Active Connections, Bluetooth 179
ActiveSync 59
setting up 59
AC wall adaptor (PS1050 - G1) 237
Addendum D-26, D-39, D-40
Addendum Add-on 2 D-27
Addendum Add-on 5 D-27
Addendum Security D-27
Add Remove Data (bar code scanning)
D-9
Prefix D-9
Strip Leading D-9
Suffix Char D-9
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning
System) 131
Aim Duration D-2
aiming dot, duration of D-2
alarm, setting 34
alarms, setting 124
aligning touchscreen 20
All
Predefined preset C-2
appending to bar codes
characters 152
App Launch icon 95
ASCII
Full Ascii D-22
audio indicators
beep conditions 22
volume adjustment 22
Aztec, 2D D-43
backlight
Battery Power tab 120
External Power tab 121
intensity 19
Intensity tab 121
backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 161
backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)
164
Bad Scan Beep 153
Bar code
Decoding symbology predefined
presets C-2
bar code
appending to 152
Decoded D-2
displaying type of bar code 153
Imager D-37
Options tab 152
symbologies
Codabar D-14, D-28, D-40
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Index
Code 11 D-30
Code 128 D-9, D-38
Code 39 D-38
Code 93 D-13, D-27, D-40
Discrete 2 of 5 D-16, D-32
EAN 13 D-10, D-24, D-38
EAN 8 D-10, D-25, D-39
Interleaved 2 of 5 D-16, D-30, D-40
Matrix 2 of 5 D-31
MSI Plessey D-14, D-29
UPC A D-11, D-25, D-39
UPC E D-11, D-26, D-40
Translation tab 154
bar code reader
applications 267
integrated scanner, operation of 249
internal or integrated 267
Barcodes Must Decode D-37
batteries
a description of 222
Battery Details tab 140
battery hotkey 34
Battery info. tab 139
battery power, managing 138
Battery Power tab 120
battery settings 139
charging 13
failure to power up 13
installing 12
pinouts B-2
removing 12
run time 23
storing 23
swap time 13
yellow LED, battery failure 13
battery
ST3006 6-slot battery charger ??–236
battery charger
safety instructions 223
battery power, managing 138
battery specifications 265
Baud 158
Baud Rate (modem setup) 183
beeper
beep conditions 22
volume adjustment 22
Bi-Direction Redundancy D-4
Block Recognizer 54
Bluetooth 24
II
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
pairing devices 25
Bluetooth devices, pairing 175
Bluetooth radio
ISM band 172
Bluetooth setup
peripherals 250
Bluetooth setup 172
About Tab 180
Active Connections 179
COM port 177
GPRS setup 180
Mode tab 176
Bluetooth specs 260
Built-In Devices tab 141
Built-in Devices tab 141
Buttons icon 98
One Shot tab 99
Sequence tab 99
Up Down Control tab 98
calculator 60
calendar 40
categories, using 42
creating & editing entries 40
deleting appointments 43
reminders, creating 41
calibrating touchscreen 20
Call Options (modem setup) 184
camera, See digital camera
camera, using 75
Card Slots (see Built-in Devices) 141
Card Slot tab 141
case, carrying 222
CDMA/1xRTT 197–208
Center Bar Code Only (Imager) D-37
certificates 122
charger
safety instructions 223
chargers 223
AC wall adaptor (PS1050 - G1) 237
installation 224
RV4000 desktop docking station 225
troubleshooting (LED) 229
RV4004 operator controls 231, 233
RV4004 quad docking station 230
troubleshooting 233
check digit D-15
Preliminary Draft
Index
Check Digit, One D-15
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) D-15
Check Digit Verification D-8, D-22,
D-24, D-29, D-30, D-32
Check Digit Verification (Codabar)
D-28
Check Digit Verification (Code 39) D-38
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) D-16,
D-41
cleaning EP10 26
Click Data (scanner double-click) 152
Click Time (scanner double-click) 152
clock, setting 34, 124
CLSI Editing D-14
CLSI Library System D-28
Codabar D-14, D-28, D-40
Codabar D-14
Codablock D-36
Code 11 D-30
Code 128 D-38
Code 128 D-9, D-23
Code 128 Emulation D-19, D-35
Code 32, Convert To D-7
Code 32 Prefix D-7
Code 39 D-6, D-21
Code 93 D-13, D-27, D-40
Code 93 D-13
Code Page
Default Local ASCII 154
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1) 154
code page (Data Handling) 154
communication
ActiveSync 59
EP10 to PC 228
Ethernet connection (quad docking
station) 231
COM port, Bluetooth 177
Composite D-18, D-34, D-41
connecting to a server with 81
connection, cancelling (modem) 184
Connection Properties (serial modem) 182
Connections 169
editing settings 193
Internet 184
managing 193
modem setup 185
network, selecting 194
network cards, setting up 190
Proxy Server setup 195
VPN, setting up 192
connections
managing 192
Connections (Internet) 184
connectivity hotkey 33
connectivity hotkeys (navigation bar) 170
Continuous Scan Mode D-3, D-20
Control Panel
Predefined presets C-2
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A D-12
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A D-12
Convert To Code 32 D-7
Convert To EAN 13 D-16, D-25
Convert To UPC -A D-26
Copyright information, operating system
119
credit card, wait for (modem setup) 184
Custom preset C-1
Data Bits 158
Data Bits (modem setup) 183
data entry modes
handwriting 68
typing 68
Data Handling (code page) 154
Data Matrix, 2D D-42
date, setting 34
Decoded D-2
Decoded (internal) scanner parameters
D-2
Decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters
D-20
decoded scanner D-2
Decode Performance D-8, D-10
Decode Performance Level D-8, D-10
Decoding symbology
Predefined symbology C-2
Default
Predefined preset C-2, C-3, C-4
Default identifier
Preset group C-2
Default Local ASCII (Code Page) 154
Delete Char Set ECIs D-6
Demo Scanner 60
desktop docking station (RV4000) 225
desktop screen (Today’s Screen) 31
Device ID tab 119
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
III
Preliminary Draft
Index
Dial-String Commands (modem setup)
184
Dial Tone, wait for (modem setup) 184
Diff Read Timeout D-21
digit
check digit D-15
digital camera
description 251
digital camera specifications 257
Discrete 2 of 5 D-16, D-32
Discrete 2 of 5 D-16
display
backlight, adjusting 19
docking port B-1
docking station
RV4000, desktop
operator controls 226
RV4004, quad
operator controls 230, 231, 233
uploading data using 24
docking stations 223
desktop docking station 225
installation at site 224
quad docking station 230
Dot Time D-2
double-click
appending characters to a decoded
bar code 152
scanner trigger 152
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 134
DSSS, 802.11a/b/g/n radio 259
EA11 2D Imager specifications 267
EAN 13 D-10, D-24, D-38
EAN 8 D-10, D-25, D-39
EAN-8 Zero Extend D-10
ECI Decoder D-6
e-mail notification 37
Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN) D-12
Enable CC-AB D-18, D-34
Enable CC-C D-18, D-34
Enable Plessy D-29
Enable RSS-14 D-17, D-33
Enable RSS Expanded D-17, D-33
Enable RSS Limited D-17, D-33
Enable TLC-39 D-18
EP10
IV
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
specifications 255
Error Handler (Psion Teklogix) 147
Error Reporting 126
Ethernet, connecting with docking station
231
Ethernet card See Network Card 190
Excel Mobile 60
External Power tab 121
features, EP10 hand-held 4
Field Size D-9
file, renaming 45
File Explorer 44, 69
copy 45
copying a file 45
deleting file 46
folders, creating 45
renaming file 45
files & folders, managing 44
find (search) 82
flight mode (disabling the WLAN
connection) 189
FNC1 Conversion D-23
folder, copying 45
folder, creating 45
folder, deleting 46
folder, renaming 45
Full Ascii D-22
Full ASCII (decoded scanner) D-8
Full ASCII (Imager) D-38
Function keys 19
Games 59
gang charger ??–236
Glossy surface
Predefined preset C-3
Good Scan Beep 153
GPRS (bluetooth) 180
GPS (external) 127
GPS Settings (built-in profiles) 128
Group, preset C-1
GS1-128 D-23
GS1-128 GS1 US D-9
GS1-128 Identifier D-23
Preliminary Draft
Index
GSM/GPRS 197–208, B-1–B-17
GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications
263
GTIN Compliant D-23, D-27
hand strap 219
hand strap (RV6021), attaching 219
hardware, description of 120
headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 25, 175
Help 51
hotkeys (navigation bar) 170
Identifier
Default preset group C-2
Imager D-37
imager (2D) scanner
scanning
2D 249
imager options 249
Imager Settings 149
Include Check (I 2 of 5) D-41
indicators
LED functions 21
scanner message 250
softkey bar 47
inking settings 110
Input Methods 107
Block Recognizer 54, 108
Input Method tab 108
Keyboard Options 109
Letter Recognizer 55, 109
soft keyboard 52
Transcriber 53
Transcriber options 110
input modes
handwriting 68
typing 68
integrated scanner option 249
Intensity tab (backlight) 121
interface, user 255
Interleaved 2 of 5 D-16, D-30, D-40
Internet connection 184
Internet Explorer 82
browsing web sites 83
Internet Sharing 70
Inverse Video Mode D-42
ISBN Conversion D-24
ISBT 128 D-10, D-23
ISBT Concat Any Pair D-24
ISBT Concat Transmit D-23
ISM band, Bluetooth radio 172
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 (code page) 154
keyboard
one shot mode 99
options 109
Scancode remapping 103
sequence 99
Unicode Mapping 102
keyboard, soft (onscreen) 52
keyboard keys 15, 17
DEL key, accessing (BKSP) 18
Macro keys 19, 101
modifier keys, locking & unlocking 17
modifiers 16
one shot mode 99
punctuation, accessing 17
Scancode Remapping 103
sequence (Buttons) 99
shift-state indicator icon 16, 17, 48
Unicode Mapping 102
L1, Set Length D-7
L2, Set Length D-7
landscape orientation 21
Laser On Time D-2, D-20
LED
desktop docking station (RV4000) 226
functions 21
RV4000 desktop dock 226
troubleshooting (desktop dock
RV4000) 229
troubleshooting quad dock RV4004
233
Length Mode D-28, D-31, D-32
Length Restriction (bar code scanning)
D-8
Field Size D-9
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Preliminary Draft
Index
Maximum Size D-9
Minimum Size D-9
Letter Recognizer 55
Letter Recognizer options (Input Methods
tab) 109
Linear
Predefined preset C-3
Linear and PDF
Predefined preset C-3
Linear Decode D-13
Linear Security Level D-4
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) D-34
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
D-34
Lock Sequence 106
Low light
Predefined preset C-3
Low light near
Predefined preset C-4
Low power
Predefined preset C-3
Low Power Timeout D-3, D-21
Macro keys 19
deleting a macro 102
executing a macro 102
Macros menu, accessing 101
recording and saving 101
maintenance (of EP10) 26
mapping
Scancode 103
Unicode 102
Matrix
Predefined preset C-3
Matrix 2 of 5 D-31
Maximum Size D-9
Max Number Barcodes D-37
Memory
Storage Card tab 138
menus
pop-up 46
using 46
messages
Scan Indicator 153
scanner warning message 153
Scan Result 153
VI
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
Messaging 84
folders 84
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing 84
Micro PDF-417 D-19, D-35, D-42
microSD, inserting 25
Minimum Cancel Time D-3, D-20
Minimum Length D-22, D-24, D-27,
D-29, D-30, D-31, D-33
Minimum Size D-9
Mode, Bluetooth 176
modem setup 185
Baud Rate 183
Call Options 184
Cancel If Not Connected 184
Data Bits 183
Dial-String Commands 184
Parity 183
Port Settings 183
Server Settings 188
Stop Bits 183
TCP_IP Settings 188
Wait For Credit Card 184
Wait For Dial Tone 184
modem using VPN clients B-7
modifier keys 16
locking & unlocking 16
One Shot Mode 99
shift-state indicator icon 16, 48
Motion
Predefined preset C-4
MSI Plessey D-14, D-29
name, assigning to hand-held 119
navigation bar 32
Battery hotkey 34
connectivity hotkey 33
Start button 32
volume control 33
navigation bar hotkeys 170
network, selecting 194
network card
settings, changing 192
setting up 190
New menu, customizing 43
Note
creating 71
recording a message (audio) 74
Preliminary Draft
Index
renaming 74
synchronizing 75
text, converting handwriting into 72
Notes 71
Notification, setting 117
NOTIS Editing D-14
One Check Digit D-15
One Shot Mode 99
One Shot tab (modifier keys) 99
onscreen (soft) keyboard 52
Options tab (bar codes) 152
orientation, screen 21
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing
(Messaging) 84
Owner Information 115
ownership information, defining 36
pairing Bluetooth devices 175
Parameter Scanning D-3, D-21, D-22,
D-23, D-24, D-27, D-29, D-30, D-31,
D-33
Parity 159
Parity (modem setup) 183
PC, connecting EP10 to 228
PDF-417 D-18, D-35, D-41
PDF and linear
Predefined preset C-3
PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio
specifications 263
Pictures
deleting 78
editing 78
opening 77
slide show, creating 78
Pictures and Videos 75
pinouts B-1, C-1
Plessy Transmit Check Digit D-29
Pocket Excel
workbook components 61
Pocket Word 67
port pinouts B-1, C-1
portrait orientation 21
Port Replicator Port A (COM5
) 158
Baud 158
Data Bits 158
Parity 159
Stop Bits 159
Trigger On Sequence 159
ports
docking port B-1
internal scanner 267
Port Settings (modem setup) 183
Postal
Predefined preset C-3
Postal
Kix D-45
PlaNET D-44
PostNET D-44
Royal D-45
Power 138
Advanced battery settings 139
Battery Details tab 140
Battery tab 139
Built-In Devices 141
Built-in Devices tab 141
Card Slot tab 141
On Battery Power 139
On External Power 139
power management specifications 257
Power Mode Decoded (Internal)
Scanner D-3
Predefined preset C-1
All C-2
Default C-2, C-3, C-4
Glossy surface C-3
Linear C-3
Linear and PDF C-3
Low light C-3
Low light near C-4
Low power C-3
Matrix C-3
Motion C-4
Postal C-3
Predefined presets C-2
Prefix D-6, D-9
Preset
Custom C-1
Group C-1
Group default identifier C-2
Predefined C-1, C-2
Preset group
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
VII
Preliminary Draft
Index
Default identifier C-2
profile, creating backup 161
profile, restoring backup 164
Programs 49, 59
minimizing 49
opening 49
properties, EP10 120
protective case 222
proxy server, setting up 195
quad docking station (RV4004) 230
radio
802.11a/b/g /n Direct Sequence SS 259
802.11ab/g/n radio specifications 259
Bluetooth specs 260
Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio
specifications 263
radio specifications 259
Raster Expand Rate (2D) D-5
Raster Height (2D) D-5
Reading Range D-22, D-24, D-27, D-30
Rectangular (2D Data Matrix) D-42
Regional Settings 143
remapping
Scancode 103
Unicode 102
Remote Desktop Mobile 80
Remove Programs 144
RSS Code D-17, D-33, D-41
RV1005 powered vehicle cradle 242
RV4000 desktop docking station
cleaning 228
RV4004 quad docking station 230
cleaning 232
Ethernet 231
troubleshooting 233
safety instructions
AC adaptor 223
battery charger 223
scanner 249
VIII
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
safety warning, scanner 249
Same Read Timeout D-21
Same Read Validate D-21
Scan Angle D-5
Scancode remapping 103
Scan Data Format D-6
Scan Indicator 153
Scan Log File 153
scanner
bar code applications 267
EA11 2D Imager specifications 267
integrated 267
safety warnings 249
specifications, internal 267
two dimensional (2D) imager scanner
249
scanner options 249
scanning
2D Maxicode D-43
2D QR Code D-43
2D UPC Half Block Stitching D-13
Aim Duration D-2
aiming (target) dot duration D-2
appending characters 152
Bad Scan Beep 153
bar code settings 150
check digit D-15
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) D-15
Check Digit Verification D-8
Check Digit Verification (Code 39)
D-38
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)
D-16, D-41
Click Data (appending data) 152
Click Time 152
CLSI Editing D-14
Codabar D-14
Code 128 D-9, D-23
Code 128 Emulation D-19
Code 32 Prefix D-7
Code 39 D-6, D-21
Code 93 D-13
Composite D-18, D-34
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A D-12
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A D-12
Convert To Code 32 D-7
Convert To EAN 13 D-16
Data Handling (code page) 154
Decoded (internal) D-2
Preliminary Draft
Index
Decoded Intermec (ISCP) D-20
Decode Perf. Level D-8, D-10
Decode Performance D-8, D-10
Delete Char Set ECIs D-6
Discrete 2 of 5 D-16
Dot Time D-2
double-click 152
EAN-8 Zero Extend D-10
ECI Decoder D-6
Enable Bookland D-12
Enable CC-AB D-18, D-34
Enable CC-C D-18, D-34
Enable RSS-14 D-17
Enable RSS Expanded D-17
Enable RSS Limited D-17
Enable TLC-39 D-18
Full ASCII D-8
Good Scan Beep 153
Imager D-37
Laser On Time D-2, D-20
Linear Decode D-13
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite) D-34
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
D-34
Micro PDF-417 D-19
NOTIS Editing D-14
Options tab 152
PDF-417 D-18
Postal
PlaNET D-44
PostNET D-44
Royal D-45
Prefix D-6
RSS Code D-17
safety instructions 249
Scan Data Format D-6
Scan Indicator 153
Scan Log File 153
Scan Result 153
Scan Result Time 153
Security Level D-13
Security Level (TLC-39) D-35
Set Length L1 D-7
Set Length L2 D-7
Suffix D-6
Supp. Redundancy D-12
Supplementals D-12
target (aiming) dot duration D-2
TLC-39 D-34
Translations tab 154
Transmit Check Digit D-8
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) D-16
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
D-15
Transmit Code 1D Char D-5
Trioptic Code 39, Enable D-6
UPC-A Check Digit D-11
UPC-A Preamble D-11
UPC-E1 Check Digit D-11
UPC-E1 Preamble D-11
UPC-EAN D-12
UPC-EAN Shared Settings D-26
UPC-E Check Digit D-11
UPC-E Preamble D-11
Scanning Mode (2D) D-5
Scan Result 153
Scan Result Time 153
screen
navigating 31
stylus 31
touch pen 31
scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab)
98
Search (find) 82
Security Level D-13
Security Level (TLC-39) D-35
Sequence (Buttons) 99
Sequence tab (Buttons) 99
serial modem setup See Connection
Properties 182
Server Settings (modem setup) 188
Set Length L1 D-7
Set Length L2 D-7
Settings 50, 95
App Launch 95
Buttons 98
Personal Tab 95
App Launch icon 95
Buttons icon 98
One Shot tab 99
Sequence tab 99
Up_Down tab 98
task manager, working with 50
shift-state indicator, accessing 48
shift-state indicator (softkey bar) 48
shift-state indicator icon 17
SIM card, inserting 25
Sled See vehicle cradle. 238
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
IX
Preliminary Draft
Index
softkey (softkey bar) 47
softkey bar
shift-state indicator 48
softkey 47
soft keyboard icon 48
softkeys 47
soft keyboard (onscreen) 52
soft keyboard icon (softkey bar) 48
softkeys (softkey bar) 47
Soft Scan Timeout 153
software specifications 256
Sound, setting events 117
Sound settings 116
specifications
802.11b/g 259
bar code application 257
digital camera 257
for EP10 hand-held 255
physical dimensions 255
power management 257
scanner, internal 267
software platform 256
user interface 255
wireless communication 256
Start/Stop Transmit D-22, D-28
Start button 32
Start Menu 43
customising 43
Stop 183
Stop Bits 159
Stop Bits (modem setup) 183
Storage Card tab 138
Strip Leading D-9
Strip Trailing D-9
stylus (touch pen), using 31
stylus tether, attaching 220
stylus tether (CH6020), attaching 221
Suffix D-6
Suffix Char D-9
Supp. Redundancy (Code 128) D-12
Supplementals (UPC-EAN) D-12
Surface
Glossy C-3
swap time (for battery) 13
target dot, duration of D-2
task
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
completed (marking as) 39
creating 37, 38
deleting 39
editing 38
notification 37
sorting 39
Task Manager 145
task manager 50
TCP_IP Settings (modem setup) 188
Teklogix Error Handling Service 147
Teklogix Imagers Settings 149
Telepen D-32
Terminal Services Client
81
session, disconnecting (without ending)
81
session, ending 81
tether for stylus 220
tether for stylus (CH6020) 221
Text
Block Recognizer 54
entering 52
Letter Recognizer 55
soft keyboard entry 52
transcriber, using 53
title bar (navigation bar) 32
TLC-39 D-34
Today’s Screen (desktop screen) 31
appearance of 118
Items (to appear in screen) 118
Total Recall 160
backup profile, creating 161
backup profile, restoring 164
touch pen, using 31
touchscreen
calibrating 20
stylus, using 31
touch pen, using 31
touchscreen, aligning (calibrating) 20
Transcriber
Inking 110
quick settings 110
Transcriber, using 53
Transcriber (Input Methods tab) 110
Translations parameters (bar codes) 154
Transmit Check Digit D-22, D-25, D-26,
D-28, D-29, D-30, D-31, D-32
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) D-16
Preliminary Draft
Index
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
D-15
Transmit Code 1D Char D-5
Transmit Number System D-25, D-26
trigger mappings 134
Trigger On Sequence 159
Trigger Press Type, Manage Triggers
menu 136
Trioptic Code 39, Enable D-6
troubleshooting
RV40004 233
RV4000 LED 229
TweakIT 164
warnings 153
Windows Mobile 6.5, navigating in 31
wireless communication specifications
256
Wireless WAN 197–208, B-1–B-17
Use Virtual Serial Port B-7
Voice B-16
WLAN connections, disabling 189
Word Completion tab 112
Word Mobile
data entry modes 68
Word See Pocket Word 67
Unicode Mapping 102
Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments) 98
UPC A D-11, D-25, D-39
UPC-A Check Digit D-11
UPC-A Preamble D-11
UPC E D-11, D-26, D-40
UPC-E1 Check Digit D-11
UPC-E1 Preamble D-11
UPC-EAN D-12
UPC-EAN Shared Settings D-26
UPC-E Check Digit D-11
UPC-E Preamble D-11
UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D D-13
Use Virtual Serial Port B-7
vehicle cradle
powered, installing cables 245
powered 10-55 VDC 238
powered 12 VDC 238
RV1005 powered 242
unpowered 238
Version tab 119
video recorder, using 79
Videos and Pictures 75
volume control 33
VPN connection, setting up 192
wall adaptor, AC (PS1050 - G1) 237
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual
XI
Preliminary Draft

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : E. Szabo
Create Date                     : 2011:02:07 09:50:43Z
Modify Date                     : 2012:04:25 15:57:54+08:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2012:04:25 15:57:54+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : EP10 Hand-Held Computer with Windows Embedded
Creator                         : E. Szabo
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:63de7647-86cd-4bae-9cc8-8c96f2320a35
Instance ID                     : uuid:930ac149-1ade-4029-b4c9-253807fec460
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 382

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools